Astra 2584 12 en Low Res

OPEL Astra
Operation, Safety, Maintenance

Data specific to your vehicle
Please enter your vehicles data here to keep it easily accessible. This data can be found under the sections "Technical Data" and "Service
and Maintenance" as well as on the identification plate.
Fuel
Designation
Engine oil
Grade
Viscosity
Tyre pressure
Tyre size front rear
Summer tyres
Winter tyres
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
EC kerb weight
= Loading
Introduction z The table of contents at the beginning Equipment marked with 3 is not found in
Your vehicle is an intelligent synthesis of of the owners manual and within the all vehicles (model variants, engine range,
advanced technology, proven safety, individual chapters will show you where national variants, special equipment,
environmental friendliness and economy. everything is. genuine Opel parts and accessories).
It now lies with you to drive your vehicle z Its index will help you find what you Page references are indicated with 3,
safely and ensure that it performs want. which means "see page".
perfectly. This Owners Manual provides z Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve 9 Danger, 9 Warning, Caution
you with all the necessary information to as points of reference or indicate some
that end. action to be performed.
9 Danger
Make sure your passengers are aware of z Black arrows in the illustrations indicate
the possible risk of accident and injury a reaction or a second action to be Text marked 9 Danger provides
which may result from improper use of the performed. information on possible fatal injury.
vehicle. Disregard of the instructions may
z This Owners Manual refers to left-hand
You must always comply with the specific drive vehicles. Operation in right-hand endanger life.
laws of the country in which you are drive vehicles is similar.
driving. These laws may differ from the
z The Owners Manual makes reference 9 Warning
information in this Owners Manual.
to internal engine designations. The
When this Manual refers to a workshop associated sales designations are Text marked 9 Warning provides
visit, we recommend your Opel Service found in the section "Technical Data". information on risk of accident or injury.
Partner. Disregard of the instructions may lead to
z Directional data, e.g. left or right, or injury.
All Opel Service Partners provide first-class front or back, in the descriptions always
service at reasonable prices. Experienced relate to the direction of travel.
mechanics trained by Opel work according Caution
to specific Opel instructions. Symbols
6 Continue reading on next page. Text marked Caution provides
The customer literature pack, consisting of
information on possible damage to the
Owners Manual, infotainment system
vehicle. Disregard of the instructions
instructions, Service Booklet and Warranty
may lead to vehicle damage.
Booklet should always be kept in the
vehicle: ready to hand in the glove We wish you many hours of pleasurable
compartment. driving.
Make use of the Owners Manual Adam Opel GmbH
z The "In Brief" section will give you an
initial overview.
Contents In brief ....................................................... 2
Keys, doors, windows, TwinTop ........... 28
Seats, interior .......................................... 64
Instruments, controls ............................ 108
Lighting ................................................. 138
Infotainment system ............................ 147
Climate control .................................... 150
Driving and operation ......................... 170
Self-help, vehicle care .......................... 226
Opel Service, maintenance ................. 274
Technical data .................................... 292
Customer information ......................... 335
Index ...................................................... 336
2 In brief
In brief
Picture no: 16968t.tif Picture no: 17333t.tif

To unlock the vehicle: Unlock the vehicle and open
Press button q with the Open&Start system 3:
Open the door by pulling the door handle. Pull handle
Open the tailgate by pulling the catch To open the tailgate, pull the catch under
below the handle strip and pulling the the handle strip and pull the tailgate
tailgate upwards. upwards.
Door locks 3 47, Open&Start system 3 3 32.
Key 3 28,
Electronic immobiliser 3 29,
Remote control 3 30,
Central locking system 3 38,
Anti-theft locking system 3 3 39,
Anti-theft alarm system 3 3 44,
TwinTop roof operation 3 3 56,
Child safety locks 3 47.
In brief 3
Picture no: 16970t.tif Picture no: 16971t.tif Picture no: 16973t.tif

Front seat legroom: Pull handle, Front seat backrest rake: Front seat height 3: Operate lever
slide seat, release handle Turn handwheel on outboard side of seat
Seats 3 64, Do not lean on seat backrest whilst Pump action on lever
Seat position 3 67. adjusting it. Up: Seat higher
Seats 3 64, Down: Seat lower
Seat position3 67,
Tilting the front passenger seat Seats 3 64,
backrest 3 66, 3 75. Seat position 3 67.
4 In brief

Seat inclination 3: Pull inner lever, Tip the front seat backs Head restraint height of front
adjust inclination, release lever, forward 3: Lift release lever, and rear outboard seats:
engage seat in position tilt seat back forward, Press button to release,
Adjust the inclination by distributing body lower release lever, seat back adjust height, engage in position
weight. is engaged in tilted position 3, Head restraints 3 68,
slide seat forwards 3 Rear centre head restraint 3 68,
Seats 3 64, To straighten the seat, slide back and it Head restraint position 3 69,
Seat position 3 67. engages in its original position 3. Raise Removing the head restraint 3 69.
release lever 3, straighten seat back, lower
release lever, seat back engages.
The seat back can only be tipped forwards
from an upright position.
Panoramic windscreen 3: before folding
the seat, push the head restraints down
and close the sun visors.
Seats 3 64,
Front passenger seat backrest,
tilting 3 66, 3 75.
In brief 5

Pull out the seat belt and engage Adjust the interior mirror by Swivel the exterior mirror by
it in the belt buckle swivelling the housing moving the lever in the required
The seat belt must not be twisted and must Swivel lever 3 on underside of mirror direction
fit snug against the body. The backrest housing to reduce dazzle at night. Mirrors 3 47,
must not be tilted back too far Interior mirror 3 47, Aspherical exterior mirror 3 47,
(max. approx. 25). Automatic anti-dazzle mirror 3 49. Folding in the exterior mirror 3 48,
To release belt, press red button on belt Heated exterior mirrors 3 49.
buckle.
Three-point seat belts 3 85,
Airbag system 3 91,
Seat position 3 67.
6 In brief
Picture no: 18437T.tif Picture no: 17328t.tif Picture no: 16986t.tif

Electrical exterior mirror Steering wheel adjustment: Exterior lights
adjustment 3 Move lever down, adjust height Turn
Select the required exterior mirror and and distance, move lever up, 7 = Off
adjust using the four-way switch. engage 8 = Parking lamps
Mirrors 3 47, Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is
9 = Dipped beam or main beam
Aspherical exterior mirror 3 47, stationary and steering column lock is
released. AUTO = Automatic dipped beam
Folding in the exterior mirror 3 48,
activation 3
Heated exterior mirrors 3 49. Airbag System 3 91.
Press
> = Fog lamps 3
r = Fog tail lamp
Lighting 3 138,
Headlamp warning device 3 18, 3 135.
In brief 7

Headlamp flash, main beam Turn signal lamps Hazard warning lamps
and dipped beam Right = Stalk up Operate with button.
Headlamp flash = Pull stalk toward Left = Stalk down Hazard warning lamps 3 141.
steering wheel
Turn signal lamps 3 139.
Main beam = Push stalk forwards
Dipped beam = Stalk forwards again
or towards steering
wheel
Main beam, headlamp flash 3 139.
8 In brief
In brief 9
1 Parking lamps, dipped beam ... 3 138 8 Left seat heating 3 ...................... 3 68 13 Infotainment system 3 .............. 3 147
Instrument illumination .............. 3 144 Deflation detection system 3 ....3 206 14 Climate control .......................... 3 150
Fog tail lamp .............................. 3 140 Tyre pressure
Fog lamps 3 ............................... 3 140 monitoring system 3 ..................3 207 15 Ashtray 3 ....................................3 105
Headlamp Ultrasonic parking sensors 3 .... 3 204 Cigarette lighter 3 ..................... 3 103
range adjustment 3 ................... 3 141 Hazard warning lamps ..............3 141 16 Start/stop button 3 ........... 3 18, 3 32
2 Side air vents .............................. 3 152 Central locking ..............................3 40
SPORT mode 3 ...........................3 200 17 Accelerator pedal........... 3 188, 3 189
3 Turn signal lamps, .......................... 3 7 Right seat heating 3 ................... 3 68 18 Ignition switch
Headlamp flash, with immobiliser ........................... 3 17
dipped beam, main beam .............3 7 9 Central information display for
display for time, date, and sensor panel
Peripheral lighting 3................... 3 143 for emergency operation
Parking lamps 3 ........................ 3 143 outside temperature,
infotainment system 3, Open&Start system 3 .................. 3 35
Cruise control 3 ......................... 3 202
Check control 3 ..........................3 133 19 Brake pedal .................... 3 189, 3 210
4 Remote control Trip computer 3 ..............3 123, 3 129
on steering wheel 3 ................... 3 147 20 Clutch pedal 3 ............................ 3 178
Climate control system 3 .......... 3 163
5 Horn ...............................................3 13 21 Steering wheel adjustment ........... 3 6
10 Centre air vents .......................... 3 152
Drivers Airbag ............................ 3 91 22 Unlocking the bonnet................. 3 226
11 Front passenger airbag .............. 3 91
6 Instruments ................................. 3 108
12 Glove compartment ......... 3 35, 3 106
7 Windscreen wipers,
windscreen washer system,
headlamp washer system 3
and rear window washer
system ...................... 3 13, 3 14, 3 136
10 In brief
In brief 11
1 Side air vents .............................. 3 152 7 Remote control 14 Accelerator pedal........... 3 188, 3 189
2 Front passenger airbag .............. 3 91 on steering wheel 3 ....................3 147 15 Brake pedal .................... 3 189, 3 210
3 Centre air vents ......................... 3 152 8 Instruments ..................................3 108 16 Clutch pedal 3 ............................ 3 178
4 Central information display for 9 Horn ...............................................3 13 17 Steering wheel adjustment ........... 3 6
time, date, Drivers Airbag ............................. 3 91
18 Start/stop button 3 ........... 3 18, 3 32
outside temperature, 10 Windscreen wipers,
infotainment system 3, windscreen washer system, 19 Ashtray 3 ....................................3 105
Check control 3 .......................... 3 133 headlamp washer system 3 Cigarette lighter 3 ..................... 3 103
Trip computer 3 ..............3 123, 3 129 and rear window 20 Climate control .......................... 3 150
Climate control system 3 ......... 3 163 washer system ......... 3 13, 3 14, 3 136
21 Infotainment system 3 .............. 3 147
5 Left seat heating 3 ..................... 3 68 11 Parking lamps, dipped beam ....3 138
Deflation detection system 3 ... 3 206 Instrument illumination ..............3 144 22 Glove compartment ........ 3 35, 3 106
Tyre pressure Fog tail lamp ...............................3 140
monitoring system 3 .................. 3 207 Fog lamps 3 ................................3 140
Ultrasonic parking sensors 3 ... 3 204 Headlamp
Hazard warning lamps .............. 3 141 range adjustment 3 ...................3 141
Central locking ..............................3 40 12 Unlocking the bonnet ................. 3 226
SPORT mode 3 ........................... 3 200
Right seat heating 3 ................... 3 68 13 Ignition switch
with immobiliser ........................... 3 17
6 Turn signal lamps, ..........................3 7 and sensor panel
Headlamp flash, for emergency operation
dipped beam, main beam .............3 7 Open&Start system 3 .................. 3 35
Peripheral lighting 3................... 3 143
Parking lamps 3 ........................ 3 143
Cruise control 3 ......................... 3 202
12 In brief
Control indicators A Engine electronics, gearbox T Winter programme of

0 Open&Start system, fault, electronics 3, immobiliser, automatic transmission 3 or
3 32, 3 108. Diesel fuel filter 3, fault, manual transmission
3 29, 3 111, 3 176, 3 182, 3 187, automated 3,
I Engine oil pressure, 3 195. 3 174, 3 180, 3 185.
3 109.
j Manual transmission 1 SPORT mode of automatic
R Brake system, clutch system automated 3, Engine start 3, transmission 3 or manual
3 110, 3 212, 3 288. 3 111, 3 171. transmission automated 3,
3 173, 3 180, 3 185.
v Airbag systems, belt tensioners, IDS+ Continuous Damping Control 3,
deployable anti-roll bars 3, SPORT mode 3, y Seat occupancy recognition 3,
3 86, 3 95, 3 101. 3 200, 3 201. 3 96.
v Electronic Stability Programme S Engine oil level 3, Z Exhaust emission 3,
(ESPPlus) 3, 3 112, 3 285. 3 113, 3 195.
3 198.
8 Exterior lights, u Anti-lock Braking System,
X Seat belt 3, 3 112, 3 138. 3 211.
3 87, 3 110.
r Ultrasonic parking sensors 3, ! Preheating system 3, Diesel
Q Open doors and luggage 3 204. particle filter 3,
compartment, 3 114.
3 111. O Turn signal lamps,
3 7, 3 112. w Deflation detection system 3,
p Alternator, tyre pressure monitoring
3 111. Y Fuel level, system 3,
3 112, 3 115, 3 192. 3 114, 3 206, 3 208.
W Coolant temperature,
3 111, 3 287. > Fog lamps 3, B Adaptive Forward Lighting
3 113, 3 140. (AFL) 3, fault,
3 142, 3 146.
C Main beam,
3 7, 3 113. m Cruise control 3,
3 202.
r Fog tail lamp,
3 113, 3 140.
In brief 13

Activate horn: Press j in centre of Windscreen wipers: Press stalk up Operating windscreen and
steering wheel slightly headlamp washer systems 3:
Airbag system 3 91, & = Fast Pull stalk towards steering wheel
Remote control on steering wheel 3 3 147. % = Slow Windscreen washer system and
$ = Timed interval wiping or automatic headlamp washer system 3 137,
wiping with rain sensor 3 Additional information 3 271, 3 290.
= Off
For a single swipe with the windscreen
wipers off, press the stalk down.
Windscreen wiper 3 136,
Adjustable wiper interval 3 3 136,
Wiper blades 3 289, 3 289,
Vehicle care 3 271.
14 In brief

Rear window wiper 3 and washer Heated rear window, To demist or defrost windows
system 3 heated exterior mirrors Set air distribution to l, turn rotary switch
Wipers on = Push stalk forwards Operate with button. for temperature and air flow clockwise;
Wipers off = Push stalk forwards again Air conditioning system 3: also press n
Air conditioning 3 150,
button; Automatic air conditioning
Washing = Hold stalk pushed fully Heated rear window 3 52.
system 3: press n and V buttons, turn
forwards rotary switch for temperature clockwise,
Rear window wiper and rear air flow to A; Climate control system 3:
window washer system 3 137, press V button
Additional information 3 271, 3 290. Climate control 3 3 150.
In brief 15

To adjust automatic mode of Manual transmission Manual transmission
climate control system 3 Reverse: with the vehicle stationary, wait automated 3
Press AUTO button, set temperature with 3 seconds after declutching and then raise N = Idling
rotary switch, open air vents the ring below the gear selector knob and o = Drive position
engage the gear.
Climate control system 3 3 163. + = Higher gear
If the gear does not engage, release the - = Lower gear
clutch, depress the clutch pedal again and
repeat gear selection. A/M = Switch between Automatic and
Manual mode
Manual transmission 3 178. R = Reverse gear
(with selector lever lock)
Always move selector lever as far as it will
go in the relevant direction.
After activation, it returns automatically to
the centre position.
The foot brake must be depressed when
starting.
Manual transmission automated 3 3 170.
16 In brief
Before starting off, check

z Tyre pressure and condition 3 213,
3 319.
z Engine oil and fluid levels 3 284 to 3 290.
z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting
and number plates are free from dirt,
snow and ice and operational.
z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are
correctly adjusted. 3 64, 3 85, 3 47.
z Check brake function at low speed,
particularly if the brakes are damp.
Automatic transmission 3 Automatic transmission with
P = Park position ActiveSelect 3
R = Reverse gear P = Park position
N = Neutral (idle) R = Reverse gear
D = Automatic gear selection N = Neutral position (idling)
3 = 1st to 3rd gear D = Automatic gear selection
2 = 1st and 2nd gear Selector lever in D to the left:
1 = 1st gear Manual mode
Starting in P or N only. To exit P, switch on + = Higher gear
ignition, activate foot brake and press - = Lower gear
button.
Starting in P or N only. To exit P, switch on
Deactivating the selector lever lock by ignition, activate foot brake and press
pressing the button. button.
Automatic transmission 3 3 178. Deactivating the selector lever lock by
pressing the button.
Automatic transmission with
ActiveSelect 3 3 183
In brief 17

Steering wheel lock and ignition Steering wheel lock and ignition To start the engine with the
with ignition switch with Start/Stop button 3 ignition switch
Turn key to position 1. Move the steering The electronic key must be in the vehicle Operate clutch and brake, automatic
wheel slightly to release the steering wheel interior. Briefly press the Start/Stop -button. transmission 3 in P or N manual
lock. Do not operate the brake or clutch during transmission automated 3 in N, do not
0 = Ignition off this time. Move the steering wheel slightly accelerate; for diesel engine - turn key to
to release the steering wheel lock. position 2 until control indicator ! goes
1 = Steering free, ignition off
out; turn key to position 3; release key once
2 = Ignition on, with diesel engine: engine is running
preheating
3 = Starting Before restarting or switching off the
engine, turn key back to 0.
To switch on the ignition, only turn the key
to 2.
18 In brief
Parking the vehicle

z Always apply handbrake without
pressing release button. Apply as firmly
as possible on a downhill slop or uphill
slope. Operate footbrake at same time
to reduce operating force.
z Switch engine off by turning ignition key
to 0. Remove ignition key and turn
steering wheel until steering lock is felt to
engage (anti-theft protection). With
Open&Start system 3 switch ignition off
and open drivers door.
In vehicles with Open&Start system 3 the
engine can only be switched off when the
To start the engine with the Releasing the hand brake: vehicle is stationary.
Start/Stop button 3 Raise lever slightly, press
The electronic key must be in the vehicle release button, lower lever fully In vehicles with automatic
interior. Operate clutch 3 and brake, transmission 3 the key can only be
Hand brake 3 212.
automatic transmission 3 in P or N, do not withdrawn when the selector lever is in
accelerate; for diesel engine, press the position P. With the Open&Start
button briefly to start preheating, wait until System 3, "P" flashes in the gear display
control indicator ! goes out and then for several seconds if P is not selected or
press button for 1 second and release when the handbrake is not applied.
the engine is running.
Open&Start system 3 3 32.
In brief 19
z If the vehicle is on a level surface or an Advice when parking Noteworthy functions

incline, with manual transmission or z Do not park the vehicle on an easy
manual transmission automated 3 flammable surface. The high
select first gear before switching temperature of the exhaust system
the ignition off; with automatic could ignite the surface.
transmission 3 move selector lever to P.
Also turn wheels away from kerb on an z On vehicles with automated manual
uphill slope. transmission 3, control indicator R
flashes for a few seconds after the
If the vehicle is on a downhill slope, ignition is switched off if the hand brake
with manual transmission or manual has not been applied, 3 176.
transmission automated 3 select reverse
gear before turning the ignition off; with z Close the windows and sun roof 3 or
automatic transmission 3 move selector TwinTop 3.
lever to P. Also turn front wheels toward z The engine cooling fans may run after
kerb. the engine has been switched off 3 284.
z Lock vehicle using p button on remote Remote control 3 30,
control or with Open&Start system 3 Open&Start system 3 32,
touch sensor in door handle of front Central locking system 3 38,
door. Anti-theft alarm system 3 3 44,
To activate the anti-theft locking TwinTop roof operation 3 3 56.
system 3 and the anti-theft alarm Decommissioning the vehicle 3 291.
system 3 press button p twice or with
Open&Start system 3 touch sensor in one
of the front door handles twice.
20 In brief

Airbag System Side airbag system 3 Curtain airbag system 3
The airbag system consists of several The side airbag is triggered in the event of The curtain airbag system triggers in case
separate systems. a side-on collision to form a safety cushion of a side-on collision and provides a safety
for the driver or front passenger in the barrier in the head area on the respective
Front airbag system respective door area. This substantially side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of
The front airbag system will be triggered in reduces the risk of injury to the upper body injury to the head considerably in case of a
the event of a serious accident involving a and pelvis. side-on collision.
frontal impact and forms safety cushions
for the driver and front passenger. The Airbag System. 3 91.
forward movement of the driver and front
passenger is checked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body and head
thereby substantially reduced.
In brief 21
Picture no: 17011t.tif Picture no: S0013209.tif Picture no: 17013t.tif

Active head restraints 3 on front Operating menus in the Selection using multifunction button 3:
seats information display 3 rotate and press multifunction button.
In the event of a rear-end impact, the Menu options are selected using menus To exit a menu, turn the multifunction
active head restraints tilt forwards slightly. and the arrow keys or the multifunction button left or right to Return or Main and
The head is more effectively supported by button on the Infotainment system 3 or the select.
the head restraint and the danger of injury left-hand adjuster wheel 3 on the steering Selection with left adjuster wheel on
in the area of the cervical vertebra is wheel. The selected menu options are steering wheel 3: rotate adjuster wheel
reduced. shown on the display. and press.
Active head restraints can be identified by Selection using arrow keys 3: Information display 3 118.
the word ACTIVE. Operate left or right arrow key.
Head restraints 3 68.
22 In brief
Board Computer 19,5 19:36

BC 1 All values
BC 2
257.0 Coolant level
1
km
Timer
40 km/h check
Tyres
31.0
8
Ltr.
7.0 L/100km OK

Trip computer 3 Check control 3 Remote control on steering
Functions: The check control software monitors wheel 3
z range, z fluid levels, The functions of the infotainment system 3
and the information display can be
z instantaneous consumption, z tyre pressure 3, operated with the buttons and adjuster
z distance travelled, z remote control battery, wheels on the steering wheel.
z average speed, z anti-theft alarm system 3, Further information is available in the
infotainment system operating
z effective consumption, z Important exterior lighting lamps, instructions.
z average consumption, including cables and fuses.
Remote control on steering wheel 3 3 147,
z stop watch, Check control 3 3 133. Infotainment system 3 147.
z tyre pressure 3.
Trip computer 3 3 123, 3 129.
In brief 23

Rear seat audio system 3 Open&Start system with Sport mode 3
Twin Audio allows rear seat occupants the electronic key and radio To activate
choice between the audio source played on remove control 3 Activate by pressing the SPORT button.
the infotainment system or a separate The Open&Start system allows the vehicle The SPORT mode is used to make
audio source. to be locked and unlocked, including anti- damping 3 and steering 3 more direct.
Rear seat audio system 3 3 148. theft locking system 3 and the anti-theft The engine responds immediately to
alarm system 3 without a mechanical key throttle application. With automated
and the engine to be started and stopped manual transmission 3 and automatic
using a start/stop button. All the driver has transmission 3, the shift points and times
to do is carry the electronic key around are altered.
with him.
Sport mode 3 3 200.
Open&Start system 3 3 32.
24 In brief
Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres

Deflation Detection System Tyre pressure monitoring Adaptive Forward Lighting
(DDS) 3 system 3 (AFL) 3
A tyre that is losing pressure grows smaller A pressure sensor is integrated in each The system improves lighting of curves and
in diameter, which causes a difference in wheel to monitor tyre pressure. increases the headlamp range.
rotation speed compared to the other Whilst driving, the current tyre pressures The beam pivots based on steering wheel
wheels. If the system detects a difference in appear in the Board Computer menu. position and speed.
speed, control indicator w illuminates red.
Deviating tyre pressure are displayed in At higher speeds and continuous straight
Deflation detection system 3 3 206. the form of messages in the information ahead travel, the beam automatically
display. raises slightly, thereby increasing
Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 3 206. headlamp range.
Adaptive driving light 3 3 142.
In brief 25

Panoramic windscreen 3 Ultrasonic parking sensors 3 Cargo box 3
To open When reverse gear is selected, the park Collapsible box to divide the luggage
Turn the handle to the right and move the pilot switches itself on automatically. compartment.
roof lining rearward to a suitable position. The system can be manually activated The cargo box may only be loaded when
To close with button r in the instrument panel the backrests are engaged in an upright
Move the roof lining forward to a suitable at speeds below 25 km/h. position.
position. When moved all the way forward, If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when When removing, start with the right half.
the roof lining engages in position. reversing, the driver receives an acoustic Cargo box 3 3 80.
Panoramic windscreen 3 3 53. warning.
Ultrasonic parking sensors 3 3 204.
26 In brief

FlexOrganizer 3 Luggage compartment cover, Astra TwinTop
The side walls contain retaining strips, Estate With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra
where various components can be To open unites the benefits of a coupe with those of
attached to divide the luggage Press handle on luggage compartment a convertible.
compartment or fasten loads. cover down. The cover automatically To optimise safety, the Astra TwinTop is
The system consists of unrolls. equipped with a rollover protection system
z adapters, Luggage compartment cover 3 3 75. with reinforced windscreen frame and the
choice of fixed or deployable anti-roll bars
z variable partition net, in addition to the front and side airbag
z mesh pockets for the side walls, systems.
z hooks in the luggage compartment.
FlexOrganizer 3 3 79.
In brief 27
The roof is operated with the buttons on Diesel particle filter 3

the roof console above the mirror or with The diesel particle filter system filters
the remote control. damaging soot particles out of the engine
To improve luggage compartment exhaust. The system has a self-cleaning
accessibility, the electric loading aid makes function that runs automatically while the
it possible to raise the open roof when it is vehicle is in motion. The filter is cleaned by
stowed in the luggage compartment. burning off the residual soot particles at
high temperature. This procedure runs
TwinTop 3 56.
automatically and can take up to
25 minutes. Fuel consumption may
increase during this time. The odour and
the smoke that are generated are normal.
Picture no: 18537t.tif

The system cannot clean itself
automatically under certain driving
conditions such as short-distance driving.
If the filter needs to be cleaned and the
previous driving conditions did not allow
automatic cleaning to take place, the
indicator lamp flashes !.
Further instructions 3 196.
28 Keys, doors, windows, TwinTop
Keys, doors, windows, Replacement keys

The key number is specified in the
TwinTop Car Pass 3.
The key is a constituent of the electronic
immobiliser.
When electronic keys of the Open&Start
system are being replaced, all keys must
Replacement keys ............................... 28 be handed to the dealer for programming.
Key with foldaway key section 3 ....... 28
Locks 3 273,
Car Pass................................................ 28
Open&Start-system, electronic key 3 32.
Electronic immobiliser.......................... 29
Store personal vehicle settings in the
vehicle key 3 ....................................... 30 Picture no: 17027t.tif
Remote control with 3 Key with foldaway key section 3
mechanical key ................................. 30
Press button to extend. To retract, press
Open&Start system 3 .......................... 32 button and audibly engage the key
Central locking system ........................ 38 section.
Fault in radio remote control or
Open&Start system 3 ....................... 41 Car Pass
Malfunction in central locking system 42 The Car Pass contains safety-related
Luggage compartment....................... 42 vehicle data and should be kept in a safe
Anti-theft alarm system 3 .................. 44 place.
Child safety locks 3 ............................. 47 When the car is at a workshop, certain
Exterior mirrors..................................... 47 servicing operations are documented in
Interior mirror ....................................... 49 the Car Pass.
Electric windows 3............................... 50
Panoramic windscreen 3 .................... 53
Sun roof 3 ............................................ 54
TwinTop................................................ 56
Keys, doors, windows, TwinTop 29

Electronic immobiliser Control indicator for immobilizer A If the control indicator A comes on after
The system checks whether the vehicle has After the ignition is switched on, control the engine has been started there is a fault
permission to start with the key used. If the indicator A illuminates briefly. in the engine electronics or the transmission
transponder in the key is recognised as If the control indicator flashes when the electronics 3 3 176, 3 182, 3 187, 3 195 or
authorised, starting is permitted. ignition is on, there is a fault; the engine there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3 3 287.
The electronic immobiliser activates itself cannot be started. Switch off the ignition Note
automatically after the key has been and then repeat the start attempt. The immobiliser does not lock the doors.
removed from the ignition or, with the If the control indicator A continues to Therefore, after leaving the vehicle always
Open&Start system 3, when the engine flash, try to start the engine using the lock it and switch on the anti-theft alarm
is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop second key and contact a workshop system 3 3 38, 3 44.
button. for assistance.
Store personal vehicle settings in

the vehicle key 3
The last settings selected
z instrument illumination,
z information display 3,
z Infotainment system 3,
z for the climate control system 3
are stored automatically upon locking
depending on the vehicle key used.
The stored settings are automatically
called up when the vehicle is unlocked.
Remote control with 3 Depending on the equipment level of
mechanical key the vehicle 3, the windows of vehicles
Depending on vehicle equipment level, one with electric windows in all doors 3 can
of the remote controls shown on this page be opened or closed from outside using
will be used. the remote control 3 50.
Remote control in version with Open&Start On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can
system 3 3 32. be opened or closed using the remote
control 3.
The remote control is integrated in the key.
Used to operate:
z central locking system,
z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,
z anti-theft alarm system 3.
The remote control has a range of approx. Fault z If the central locking system is
5 metres. This range can be affected by If the central locking system cannot be overloaded as a result of repeated
outside influences. Aim the remote control operated with the remote control, it may operation at short intervals. The power
at the vehicle to operate. Operation is be due to the following: supply is cut off for a brief period.
confirmed through flashing of the hazard z Range exceeded. z Interference from higher-power radio
warning lamps. waves from other sources.
z Low battery voltage in remote control.
Handle the remote control with care, Battery replacement. Open drivers door using the key 3 41.
protect it from moisture and high
temperatures and avoid unnecessary z Frequent, repeated operation of the
operation. remote control outside the reception
range of the vehicle (e.g. too far from
vehicle, remote control is then no longer
recognised). Remote control
synchronisation.
Key with fixed key section

Have the battery changed by a workshop.
Remote control synchronisation
After replacing the battery, unlock door
with key in lock 3 41. The remote control is
synchronised by switching the ignition on.

Remote control battery replacement Open&Start system 3
Replace the battery as soon as the range The Open&Start system allows the vehicle
of the remote control begins to shrink. to be locked and unlocked, including
Batteries do not belong in household operation of the anti-theft locking
waste. They must be disposed of at an system 3 and the anti-theft alarm
appropriate recycling collection station. system 3, and also allows the engine
to be switched on and off without a
Key with foldaway key section
mechanical key. All the driver has to do is
Open key section 3 28. Open remote
carry the electronic key around with him.
control. Replace battery (battery type
CR 20 32), paying attention to installation Depending on the equipment level of the
position. Close remote control and vehicle 3, the windows of vehicles with
synchronise. electric windows in all doors 3 can be
opened or closed from outside using the
remote control of the electronic key 3 50.
On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be
opened or closed with the remote control 3
of the electronic key.
If the brake or clutch pedal is depressed,

the engine can be started right away with
a single press on the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the Start/Stop button interrupts
the starting procedure.
The engine and the ignition are switched
off by pressing the Start/Stop button again.
The vehicle must be stationary. The
immobiliser is activated at the same time.
If the ignition has been switched off and
the vehicle is stationary, the steering wheel
lock activates automatically when the
Picture no: 17032t.tif Picture no: 17033t.tif drivers door is opened or closed.
The electronic key must be within the When the Start/Stop button is pressed, the The electronic key must be within the
external reception range about 1 metre system re-checks the authorisation. The interior reception in order to switch the
from the vehicle in order to lock and unlock electronic key has to be recognised in the ignition on or off. We recommend that the
the vehicle. interior in order to do this. After the key has driver carries the electronic key on his or
If the electronic key is recognized as been authorised the ignition switches on. her person. If the electronic key is not
"authorised", the vehicle can be unlocked At the same time, the electronic recognised, try a different position for the
by pulling a door handle or the knob immobiliser is switched off and the electro- key.
beneath the tailgate handle and the doors mechanical steering column lock is
Do not put the electronic key in the
and the tailgate can be opened. deactivated. Pressing the Start/Stop button
luggage compartment or in front of the
again with the brake or clutch pedal
information display.
depressed or in P or N with automatic
transmission 3 starts the engine. Press the
6
button for at least one second with the
vehicle stationary or hold until the engine
starts.
The remote control has a range of approx.

5 metres. This range can be affected by
outside influences. Aim the remote control
at the vehicle to operate. Operation is
confirmed through flashing of the hazard
warning lamps.
Handle the remote control with care,
protect it from moisture and high
temperatures and avoid unnecessary
operation.

The vehicle is locked from the outside with Remote control
the doors closed by touching the sensor The vehicle can be locked and unlocked by
panel in the door handle of one of the front in the usual way using the remote control
doors. The electronic key must be within with the buttons on the electronic key.
the external reception range of In addition, the anti-theft locking system
approximately one metre from the vehicle. and anti-theft alarm system can be armed
The Open&Start system 3 does not the lock and disabled using the remote control.
the vehicle automatically if the electronic Depending on the equipment level of the
key is outside the external reception range vehicle 3, the windows of vehicles with
of approximately one metre from the electric windows in all doors 3 can be
vehicle. opened or closed from outside using the
remote control.
InSP3 in the service display or an

appropriate message in the information 3
display indicates that the battery of the
electronic key needs replacing 3 37.
If the control indicator 0 is permanently
on, an error has occurred in the system.
Lock or unlock vehicle using the remote
control or the emergency key if necessary
3 41, or try using the spare key.
If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that
the steering wheel lock is still locked: move
steering wheel to and fro a little and press
Start/Stop button again.
Control indicator for Open&Start If 0 lights while driving, there is a system Emergency operation
system 0 fault. Contact a workshop immediately. If the Open&Start system fails or the
If the control indicator flashes 0 with the Emergency operation 3 35. electronic key (control indicator 0 flashes
ignition switched on or with the engine or permanently on) the drivers door can be
Lockable glovebox, Astra TwinTop with
running an operating error has occurred, locked or unlocked with the emergency key
Open&Start system 3
e.g. the electronic key is no longer within in the electronic key: press locking
In addition to the electronic key of the
the reception range of the vehicle interior. mechanism on underside and remove cap
Open&Start system, there is a standard key
During the next starting procedure the toward the front by applying gentle
without remote control for the glove
engine may not be able to be started. Press pressure to the cap. Push emergency key
compartment lock.
Start/Stop key somewhat longer to switch towards the outside over the detent and
the ignition off. remove.
Flashing of the 0 can also be an indication
6
of complete failure of the electronic key. In
this case operation is only possible using
the emergency facility 3 35.

Only the drivers door can be locked and To start the engine, hold electronic key in The press start/stop button.
unlocked using the emergency key. marked position, operate brake or clutch To switch the vehicle off, press start-stop
Unlocking the entire vehicle 3 41. In pedal or with automatic transmission 3 button for at least 1 second. Lock doors,
vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system 3 operate brake pedal and select P or N. except drivers door 3 41. Lock drivers
an alarm may be triggered when the side door using emergency key.
vehicle is unlocked. To deactivate the
alarm system and release the steering lock, This facility is for emergency use only.
switch ignition on: hold electronic key at Replace the battery of the electronic key
marked location on steering column as soon as possible or have the system
panelling and press start/stop button. repaired. Contact a workshop for
Repeat procedure if necessary. assistance.
z Electronic key out of reception range,

or out of range of remote control.
z Low battery voltage in remote control.
Battery replacement.
z Frequent, repeated operation of the
remote control outside the reception
range (e.g. too far from vehicle, remote
control is then no longer recognised).
Remote control synchronisation.
z If the central locking system is
overloaded as a result of repeated
operation at short intervals. The power
Picture no: 17040t.tif Picture no: 17041t.tif supply is cut off for a brief period.
Replacing battery in electronic key Push off cover with emblem on side z Interference from higher-power radio
Replace the battery immediately if the towards the outside using the buttons. waves from other sources.
system is no longer working properly or the Replace battery (battery type CR 20 32), To eliminate the fault, change the position
range of the remote control is reducing. noting installation position. Clip in covers of the electronic key or remote control or
The need for a battery change is indicated and synchronise remote control. change the battery in the remote control.
by InSP3 in the service display or, in
Remote control synchronisation If the fault persists, contact a workshop for
vehicles with check control 3, by an
The remote control synchronises itself assistance.
appropriate message in the display 3 116.
automatically during every starting Emergency operation 3 35.
To replace the battery, operate lock on procedure.
underside of electronic key and remove
cover by pushing gently forwards 3 35, Fault in Open&Start system or remote
Fig. 17037 T. control
If the central locking cannot be operated
or the engine cannot be started, the cause
may be one of the following:

Central locking system Open&Start system with electronic key 3 To lock
Unlocking and locking of doors, luggage The vehicle is unlocked by pulling a door Close doors, luggage compartment and
compartment and tank flap. handle or the button under the tailgate tank flap.
handle strip. Remote control with mechanical key
To unlock
Remote control with mechanical key For this to be possible, the electronic key Press button p on remote control.
Press button q on remote control. must be outside of the vehicle. The range is
approximately one metre.
To open the door, pull the handle. Open
the luggage compartment by pulling the or
knob under the tailgate handle. Press button q of the electronic keys
If the door or the luggage compartment is remote control.
open, Q illuminates in the instrument If the door or the luggage compartment is
cluster. open, Q illuminates in the instrument
cluster.
Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,
9 Warning
Do not use the system if there are people

in the vehicle! The doors cannot be
unlocked from the inside.

Open&Start system with electronic key 3 Remote control with mechanical key
Touch the sensor field in the door handle of All doors must be closed.
one of the front doors. If the ignition was on, the drivers door
During this time, the electronic key must be must be opened and closed once so
outside of the vehicle. The range is that the vehicle can be secured.
approximately one metre. No other key All doors are secured against opening.
must be inside the vehicle.
Within 15 seconds of locking, press
The Open&Start system does not lock the the p button on the remote control again.
vehicle automatically.
The mechanical anti-theft locking system is
or deactivated when the vehicle is unlocked.
Press button p of the electronic keys
remote control again.
Note
z The central locking system will not lock
if the drivers door is not properly
closed. Q illuminates in the instrument
cluster as an indication.
z If the front passenger door, the rear
doors 3 or the luggage compartment is
not correctly closed, the LED in the
central locking button m flashes for
10 seconds when the central locking system
is operated, and Q illuminates in the
instrument cluster at the same time.
z A short time after unlocking with the
Picture no: 17044t.tif Picture no: 17045t.tif remote control, the doors are locked
Open&Start system with electronic key 3 Central locking system button for locking automatically if no door has been
All doors must be closed. and unlocking the doors from inside the opened.
If the ignition was on, the drivers door vehicle
Press button m in the centre console: doors z To lock the doors from within (e.g. to
must be opened and closed once so that prevent unwanted entry from outside),
the vehicle can be secured. are locked or unlocked.
press central locking system switch m in
All doors are secured against opening. The LED in the central locking system the centre console.
button m illuminates for around 2 minutes
Within 15 seconds of locking, touch the after locking with the remote control. z When the vehicle is unlocked with the key
sensor field in the door handle of a front in the drivers door lock, the other doors
door again If the doors are locked from the inside do not unlock until the drivers door is
during the journey using the central locking opened.
For this to be possible, the electronic key system button, the LED m lights
must be outside of the vehicle. The range is permanently. z Doors that have been locked using the
approximately one metre. central locking system can also be
If the key is in the ignition, locking is only opened by pulling the handle on the
or possible if all doors are closed. inside of the doors. The central locking
press button p of the electronic keys When the mechanical anti-theft locking is also unlocked at the same time (not
remote control again. system 3 is active see previous page the possible with Astra TwinTop if roof is
doors cannot be unlocked with this button. open).
z Locked doors unlock automatically in Fault

the event of an accident of a certain If the central locking system cannot be
severity (to allow external help to gain operated, it may be due to the following:
access). The hazard warning lamps and z If the central locking system is
courtesy lamp also come on. For this to overloaded as a result of repeated
occur, the key must be in the ignition operation at short intervals. The power
switch. supply is cut off for a brief period.
z With the Open&Start system 3 the z Faulty fuse in fuse box 3 246.
vehicle cannot be unlocked until
2 seconds after locking. Within this time, Contact a workshop to have the cause of
a door handle can be pulled or the the fault remedied.
button beneath the tailgate handle For operating the drivers door with the
operated to check whether the vehicle key, see following section.
is locked. Picture no: 17047t.tif
z The Open&Start system 3 does not lock Fault in radio remote control or
the vehicle automatically if the electronic Open&Start system 3
key is outside the reception range of the To unlock
vehicle (more than 1 metre away from Turn key, or emergency key for Open&Start
the vehicle). system 3 3 35, forwards in the drivers door
z When using the Open&Start system 3, lock as far as it will go. Return key to a
there must not be an electronic key vertical position and remove. The entire
inside the vehicle when locking. vehicle is unlocked when the drivers door is
opened.
z The locking sensors in the door
handles must be kept clean to
ensure unrestricted functionality
of the Open&Start system 3.
For Astra TwinTop with open roof - after Luggage compartment

opening the drivers door, press the central To unlock
locking button m in the centre console. The Remote control with mechanical key
vehicle will then be unlocked, provided the Press button q on the remote control.
anti-theft locking system 3 is not engaged. The luggage compartment is unlocked
Switch on the ignition to deactivate the together with the doors.
anti-theft alarm system 3. Emergency
operation of the Open&Start system 3 Open&Start system with electronic key 3
3 35. Pulling the button below the handle
unlocks and opens the luggage
To lock compartment and doors when the
Open passenger door, close drivers door, electronic key is detected within the outer
press central locking button m in centre reception range.
console. Central locking system locks all
doors. Close passenger door. or
Malfunction in central locking To lock Press button q on the remote control of
Insert the key or emergency key for the electronic key, this unlocks the luggage
system Open&Start system 3 3 35 into the opening compartment and the doors.
To unlock above the lock on the inside of the door
With Open&Start system 3 3 35, turn key or and press until the lock audibly engages.
emergency key forwards in the drivers Then close the door. The procedure must
door lock as far as it will go. Return key to be repeated for each door. The drivers
vertical position and remove. The other door can also be locked from outside using
doors can be opened by pulling the handle the lock. The unlocked fuel filler flap and
on the inside of the doors (not possible if tailgate/boot lid cannot be locked.
anti-theft locking system 3 was activated
beforehand). Luggage compartment and
tank flap remain locked. To deactivate the
anti-theft alarm system 3 switch ignition
on 3 44.

To open To close To lock
The luggage compartment is opened by Close luggage compartment using the Close doors, luggage compartment and
operating the button beneath the handle. handle on the inside of the tailgate. tank flap.
Do not activate the button under the Remote control with mechanical key
9 Warning handle strip while closing as this will unlock Press button p on remote control.
Do not drive with the tailgate open or it again. Open&Start system with electronic key 3
ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky Press button p of the electronic key remote
objects, since toxic exhaust gas could control or touch sensor in handle of one of
penetrate the interior. the front doors. The electronic key must be
recognised in the external reception area.
When certain accessories are fitted, the It is advisable for the driver to keep the
tailgate cannot be held in the open electronic key on his person.
position.
Anti-theft alarm system 3

monitors
z the doors, luggage compartment,
bonnet,
z the passenger compartment,
z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised,
z the ignition.
9 Warning
Do not use the system if there are people

in the vehicle! The doors cannot be
unlocked from the inside. Picture no: 17043t.tif Picture no: 17044t.tif
To activate Open&Start system with electronic key 3
Remote control with mechanical key All doors, windows and the bonnet must be
All doors, windows, the sun roof 3 and the closed.
bonnet must be closed. If the ignition was switched on, the drivers
If the ignition was switched on, the drivers door must be opened and closed once so
door must be opened and closed once that the anti-theft alarm system can be
so that the anti-theft alarm system can switched on.
be switched on. Within 15 seconds of locking, touch the
Within 15 seconds of locking, press sensor field in the door handle of a front
the p button on the remote control again. door again.
For this to be possible, the electronic key
must be outside of the vehicle. The range
is approximately one metre.
or
press button p of the electronic keys
remote control again.
4. Switch on the anti-theft alarm system.

LED illuminates. The system is armed
after approx. 10 seconds. The LED
flashes until the system is deactivated.
For Astra TwinTop, passenger
compartment monitoring is deactivated if
the roof is open to prevent false alarms.

Activation without monitoring of Light emitting diode (LED)
passenger compartment and vehicle tilt During the first 10 seconds of anti-theft
To activate e. g. if animals are left in the alarm system activation:
vehicle. z LED on = Test, activation delay,
1. Close tailgate and bonnet. z LED flashes = Door, tailgate or bonnet
2. Press button b in the roof console. quickly open, or system fault.
The LED in button m flashes
(max. 10 seconds), see next page. After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft
alarm system activation:
3. Close doors.
z LED flashes = System activated,
slowly
z LED on after = Deactivation function.
approx.
1 second
In the event of a fault, contact a workshop
for assistance.
In the event of a fault in the remote control

or the Open&Start system, unlock door with
the key 3 41.
If the alarm is triggered when the drivers
door is opened, deactivate the anti-theft
alarm system by switching on the ignition.
Note
z Changes to the vehicle interior, such as
the use of seat covers, could impair the
function of passenger compartment
monitoring.
z Disengage interior monitoring if the
Picture no: 16968t.tif Picture no: 17032t.tif interior of the parked vehicle is heated.
To deactivate Open&Start system with electronic key 3 Alarm
Remote control with mechanical key The vehicle is unlocked by pulling a door If triggered, the alarm provides an acoustic
Press button q on remote control handle or the catch under the tailgate (horn) and visual (hazard warning lamps)
or handle strip. The anti-theft alarm system is signal. The quantity and duration of the
then disabled. alarm signals are specified in legislation.
Switch on ignition.
For this to be possible, the electronic key The alarm can be silenced by pressing a
must be outside of the vehicle. The range is button of the remote control or by
approximately one metre. switching on the ignition. The anti-theft
or alarm system is deactivated at the same
time.
Press button q of the electronic keys
remote control.

Child safety locks 3 Exterior mirrors Adjust exterior mirrors electrically 3
Manual adjustment with handles in the Select the required exterior mirror with the
9 Warning front doors or electric 3 with switch in mirror switch and adjust with the four-way
drivers door console. switch.
Always activate the child safety locks if
children are sitting on the rear seats. Adjust exterior mirrors manually Spherical exterior mirror 3
Swivel the exterior mirror by moving the The aspherical mirror glass reduces the
Using key or screwdriver, turn knob on rear lever in the required direction blind spot. The curvature makes objects
door lock from the vertical position: door appear smaller, so it is more difficult to
cannot be opened from inside. estimate the distance from following
vehicles.
If an electrical retracted mirror is extended

manually, pressing button n will cause the
mirror to move all the way forward. The
other mirror will be electrically swiveled to
the driving position. If button n is pressed
again, both mirrors will be electrically
retracted. Press again: both mirrors swivel
to the driving position.
Fold mirrors back into driving position
before moving away.

Swing in exterior mirror For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior
Manual: The exterior mirrors can be swung mirrors will swing out of their normal
in by pressing on the outside of the mounting position if they are bumped with
housing. sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by
Electrically 3: Press n and both mirrors will applying slight pressure to the mirror
swing in. housing.
Press button n again - both exterior

mirrors swivel to the driving position.

Heated exterior mirrors 3 Interior mirror Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3
Heating is activated or deactivated with To adjust, swivel mirror housing. Dazzling is automatically reduced at night.
the button. With the ignition off, the mirror does not
Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror
Heating takes place with the engine To reduce dazzle, swivel the lever on the dim.
running and is switched off automatically underside of the mirror housing to the side.
after several minutes.
Electric windows 3 Readiness for operation

The electric windows can be used
9 Warning z with ignition on,
Take care when operating the electric z within 5 minutes of switching ignition
windows. Risk of injury, particularly to off 3,
children.
z within 5 minutes of switching ignition key
If there are children on the rear seat, to position 1.
switch on the child safety system 3 for
the electric windows. Stand-by after switching on the ignition
ends when the drivers door is opened.
Keep a close watch on the windows
when closing them. Ensure that nothing
becomes trapped in them as they move.
Operation
For incremental operation, briefly pull or
press the switch of the window in question.
For automatic opening or closing, pull or
press the switch longer. Pull or press the
switch again to stop the movement.
Astra Twin Top: when a door is opened
the window opens a little way and closes
automatically when the door is shut.

Safety function Child safety system for rear windows 3 Central switch for electric windows,
If the window glass encounters resistance Switch z between the rear switches in the Astra TwinTop
above the middle of the window during drivers door handle Button $ or " in the roof console.
automatic closing, it is immediately z Forward (red field visible): Press button $: all windows are closed.
stopped and the window opened again. Rear door switches non-operational. Press button ": all windows are opened.
In the event of difficulty due to frost or the z Rearward (green field visible):
like, press the relevant window switch Rear door switches operational.
several times until the window is closed.

Operating windows from outside 3 Open&Start system with electronic key 3 Heated rear window 3
Depending on the equipment level of the To open, keep the q button on the remote Heating is activated or deactivated with
vehicle 3, the windows of vehicles with control pressed. To close, keep the p the button.
electric windows in all doors 3 can be button pressed or touch the sensor field in Heating takes place with the engine
opened or closed from outside using the the door handle for a longer time. running and is switched off automatically
remote control. For this to be possible, the electronic key after several minutes.
Remote control with mechanical key must be outside of the vehicle. The range is Astra TwinTop: The headed rear window
Hold button q or p on the remote control approximately one metre. and heated exterior mirrors 3 are
depressed until all windows have opened Stand-by after switching on the ignition deactivated when the roof is open.
or completely closed. ends when the drivers door is opened. The heated rear window automatically
switches on when the diesel particle filter is
being cleaned 3 depending on the engine.
Climate control 3 150.
Overload
If the windows are repeatedly operated at
short intervals, the power supply is briefly
cut off.
Fault
If the windows cannot be opened and
closed automatically because of an
interruption to the power supply, for
example, activate electric windows as
follows:
1. Close doors.
2. Switch on ignition.
3. Close the window all the way and hold Picture no: 17140t.tif Picture no: 17141t.tif
the button depressed at least 5 seconds. Panoramic windscreen 3 Close the roof lining
Open the roof lining Move the roof lining forward to a suitable
4. Open the window all the way and hold
Turn the handle to the right and move the position. When moved all the way forward,
the button depressed at least 1 second
roof lining rearward to a suitable position. the roof lining engages in position.
longer.
Note
5. Repeat for each window.
Close the sun visors before sliding the roof
lining.
To raise
When the roof is closed, press button .
The roof is tilted in the rear.
To open
Press button again from the tilted
position. The roof opens to its stop.
To close
Press button d.
For reasons of safety, the roof closes from
its open position to approx. 20 cm. Hold
button d depressed to close completely.

Sun roof 3 Sunblind
Used to reduce sun penetration into the
9 Warning interior when the sun roof is closed.
Take care when operating the sun The sunblind opens when the sun roof
roof 3. Risk of injury, particularly to opens.
children. To open
Keep a close watch on the sun roof when Press button G. The sunblind opens to its
closing it. Ensure that nothing becomes stop.
trapped in it as it moves. To close
Operated via rocker switches in the roof Press button H.
console when the ignition is switched on. For reasons of safety, the roller blind closes
For incremental operation, briefly press the from its open position to approx. 20 cm.
button. For automatic opening or closing, Hold button H depressed to close
press the button longer. completely.
Note Overload Fault

z If the top of the roof is wet, raise roof, If the system is overloaded, the power If the sun roof and sun shade do not
allow water to run off and then open supply is automatically cut off for a short operate properly, activate electronics as
roof. time. follows:
z When using a roof rack, check the The system is protected by fuses in the fuse 1. Switch on ignition.
clearance of the sun roof to avoid box 3 246. 2. Close the sun roof and hold button d
damage. depressed at least 10 seconds.
3. Close sunblind and hold button H
depressed at least 10 seconds.
TwinTop
With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra
unites the benefits of a coupe with those of
a convertible.
9 Warning
Take care when operating the

convertible hardtop. Risk of injury.
Monitor the action zone above, to the
side and to the rear of the vehicle during
roof operation. Make sure that nothing
could become pinched.
Make sure no one is in the action zone Picture no: 18620T.tif Picture no: 17962t.tif
of the roof or boot lid during roof Operating the convertible hardtop To open the roof
operation. Risk of injury. Stand-by with ignition key in lock from There must be no objects in front of the
Check the amount height, length and position 1, or for Open&Start-System 3 rear window or in the pivot area of the roof
width of available space before switch on ignition. and boot lid.
operating the roof, e. g. in a garage, Requirements: Hold button > in the roof console
parking garage or when a bicycle rack depressed until the roof is completely open
is fitted. z Vehicle is stationary or driving no more
than 30 km/h. and the boot lid is closed.
Vehicle passengers should be informed
z Luggage compartment blind is closed An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the
accordingly.
and engaged - see above 3 81. opening procedure.
Before leaving the vehicle, remove
the ignition key in order to prevent z Boot lid is closed. Open the door windows slightly before
unauthorised operation of the opening the roof. If button > is pressed
windows and sun roof. If any of the requirements are not fulfilled, again after the acoustic signal sounds, the
a warning buzzer sounds when the switch is door windows will close.
actuated and the roof does not open or
close.

With the vehicle stopped, the roof can be To close the roof With the vehicle stopped, the roof can be
opened using the remote control 3. Unlock There must be no objects in the pivot area closed using the remote control 3. Lock the
the vehicle. Press button q again and keep of the roof and boot lid. vehicle. Press button p again and keep
pressed until the roof has opened fully and Hold button < in the roof console pressed until the roof and boot lid have
the boot lid has closed. depressed until the roof and boot lid are closed completely.
During operation with the remote control, completely closed.
the door windows are opened completely. An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the
closing procedure.
Open the door windows slightly before
closing the roof. If button < is pressed
again after the acoustic signal sounds, the
door windows will close.
Indicator and warning buzzers z Continuous warning buzzer during roof Note
z Indicator buzzer upon completed operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have z Do not open the luggage compartment
opening or closing of the convertible been triggered. until the acoustic signal indicating the
hardtop. z Continuous warning buzzer starting one end of the roof opening or closing
z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising minute before the end of the 9-minute procedure has sounded.
or lowering of the electric luggage standby time with the roof in an z The luggage compartment blind must
compartment loading aid. intermediate position. always be closed during roof operation.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed z Continuous warning buzzer starting one z There must be no one at the covers
during roof operation. minute before the end of the 9-minute behind the rear head restraints.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully standby time with the loading aid in a z There must be no objects in the pivot
opening during operation of the luggage raised position. area or the roof or on the covers behind
compartment loading aid. z Continuous warning buzzer when closing the rear head restraints.
z Gong tone during roof operation if the boot lid if the lowering process of the z The roof can only be operated at
vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h. electric load aid is not complete or was temperatures above 20 C. If the
interrupted. temperature is below this limit, a gong
z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds
30 km/h if the roof is not fully open or will sound three times when roof
closed. operation is requested.
z Three gong tones during roof or loading z Frequent operation of the roof with the
aid operation if the luggage engine off discharges the battery.
compartment blind is not attached. z Repeated operation of the roof without
z Three gong tones during roof operation breaks can cause overloading and
if outside temperature is below 20 C, therefore malfunctions.
vehicle battery voltage is too low or the
system is overloaded.
z The roof can be held in an intermediate Fault Rollover protection system

position for 9 minutes to facilitate The automatic drive of the roof is only To optimise safety in the event of a
cleaning of roof spaces. This is done by operational if the roof is in the proper open rollover, the Astra TwinTop is equipped
disengaging the actuation switch. One or closed position. with reinforced windscreen frame and anti-
minute before the end of this period, a Check if: roll bars behind the rear sat head
continuous buzzer sounds as a warning restraints. The anti-roll bars are fixed or
that the hold period is almost over and z The luggage compartment blind is deployable depending on vehicle variant.
the roof could start to move. engaged in the closed position.
z Activating the roof on uneven ground z The boot lid is completely closed.
can lead to malfunctions and damage. z Outside temperature is above 20 C.
z There is sufficient battery voltage.
z There is a system overload.
If the automatic drive is not operational,
two persons are required to manually close
the roof. See the accompanying
instructions for Astra TwinTop. We
recommend that you seek professional
assistance.

Fixed anti-roll bars Deployable anti-roll bars 3 Luggage compartment
are secured to the vehicle bodywork. are located between the rear head The roof can only be opened if the load in
restraints and the boot lid in such a way the luggage compartment does not
that they are out of sight. In the event of a exceed the height of the luggage
rollover, head-on collision or side impact, compartment blind or protrude sideways.
the anti-roll bars deploy upwards within The load height marked in the figure must
milliseconds. The convertible roof must not not be exceeded. The luggage
be operated if the anti-roll bars have been compartment blind must be flat; objects
deployed. A continuous warning will sound below it must not press it upwards.
if the switch is actuated. The airbag control Otherwise the roof and load may be
indicator v illuminates if the anti-roll bars damaged.
have been deployed. Electrically operated loading aid for the
Pushing the anti-roll bars back luggage compartment 3 81.
manually 3 101. Luggage compartment blind 3 81.
Additional information 3 103.
Blockage of boot lid on closure 3

To avoid damage to the open roof, boot lid
or load, the boot lid can only be closed if
the electric load aid is in the lower end
position 3 81.

Unblocking on failure of electric drive Wind deflector 3
Push locking lever forward as shown in the With the wind deflector installed
figure. turbulence, draughts and noise in the
passenger compartment are reduced when
the roof is open.
The rear seats cannot be occupied when
the wind deflector is in place.
Do not place any objects on the wind
deflector.
With tyre repair set 3, the wind deflector is
folded down into a storage
compartment 3 in the luggage
compartment below the loading floor
cover.
For the version with spare wheel 3, the
wind deflector is folded away in the
luggage compartment.

Fitting Join together the unfolded ends of the wind Insert the guide clips of the wind deflector
Take the wind deflector from the luggage deflector: press in the pin at the slider, in the seat belt recesses between the rear
compartment. guide the hinge over the pin and release head restraints.
Expand the collapsed wind deflector as the slider so that the pin engages in the
illustrated. hinge.

Pull the toggle of the right and left locking The wind deflector can be folded back Removing
pin and turn to lock. Straighten out the when not in use. Remove in reverse order, wind deflector is
wind deflector, turn the toggle back and If the wind deflector is folded and the rear completely folded down in the luggage
engage the locking pin in the recess in the seats are unoccupied, the wind deflector compartment:
side trim. can remain mounted in the vehicle when for tyre repair kit 3 in the compartment
the roof is closed. below the loading floor cover.
for version with spare wheel 3, place in
the luggage compartment.
The wind deflector must never protrude
upwards or sideways from the luggage
compartment, see marked loading height
3 60, Fig. 17973 T.
64 Seats, interior
Seats, interior Operating the seat belts..................... 87

Child restraint system 3...................... 88
Airbag system...................................... 91
Rollover protection system 3 ............. 101
Cigarette lighter 3............................... 103
Front seats ........................................... 64 Accessory sockets 3............................ 104
Head restraints .................................... 68 Ashtray 3 ............................................. 105
Armrest 3 ............................................. 70 Foldaway tables 3 .............................. 106
Extending the luggage compartment, Stowage compartments ..................... 106
Saloon ................................................ 71 Stowage nets and pockets 3 ............. 107
Extending the luggage compartment, Drinks holders 3 .................................. 107
Estate ................................................. 72
Sun visors ............................................. 107
Extending the luggage compartment,
Astra TwinTop ................................... 74 Picture no: 16970t.tif
Tilt front passenger seat backrest Front seats
forward 3........................................... 75
9 Warning
Luggage compartment cover ............ 75
Safety net 3, Estate............................. 77 Never adjust seats while driving as they
Luggage compartment grille 3, could move uncontrollably.
Delivery Van ...................................... 78
Adjust foot room of seat
Lashing eyes 3 .................................... 79 Pull the handle on the front seat, slide the
Rails and hooks in the luggage seat and release the handle.
compartment 3, Estate .................... 79
FlexOrganizer 3................................... 79
Cargo box 3......................................... 80
Luggage compartment blind,
Astra TwinTop ................................... 81
Easy Load............................................. 81
Notes on loading the vehicle.............. 83
Three-stage safety system.................. 84
Three-point seat belts ......................... 85
Belt tensioners...................................... 85
Seats, interior 65

Adjusting the backrest Adjusting the seat height 3 Adjusting the seat angle 3
Relieve the load on the backrest and turn Operate the lever on the outside of the Pull the inner lever at the front of the seat,
the side handwheel. seat. adjust the angle by shifting your body
Pump action on lever weight and release the lever.
Up: Seat higher Allow the seat to engage audibly.
Down: Seat lower
66 Seats, interior
The seat back can only be tipped forwards

from an upright position.
When the backrest is folded forward, do
not activate the handwheel for backrest
adjustment.
In vehicles with a panoramic window 3:
to tilt seats forward, push head restraints
down and lift up sun visors.

Adjusting the lumbar support 3 Fold the seat backrest forwards 3
Turn the side handwheel on backrest while To fold forwards, raise the release lever
relieving the load on the backrest. and fold the backrest forwards. Lower the
release lever and the backrest engages in
the forward-folded position 3. Slide seat
forwards 3.
To straighten the seat, slide back and it
engages in its original position 3. Raise
release lever 3, straighten seat back,
lower release lever, seat back engages.
For seat without memory function 3:
engage seat in desired position.
Seats, interior 67
z Sit with your shoulders as far back against

the backrest as possible. Set the backrest
rake so that you can easily reach the
steering wheel with your arms slightly
bent. Maintain contact between your
shoulders and the backrest when turning
the steering wheel. Do not angle the
backrest too far back. We recommend a
maximum rake of approx. 25.
z Adjust the steering wheel 3 6.
z Set seat height 3 high enough to have a
clear field of vision on all sides and of all
display instruments. There should be at
Picture no: 17959t.tif Picture no: 18532t.tif least one hand of clearance between
Adjusting the thigh support 3 on the Seat position your head and the headlining. Your
sports seats 3 thighs should rest lightly on the seat
Press the button on the front of the 9 Warning without pressing into it.
adjustment padding and slide the thigh
support. Do not drive the vehicle unless the seats z Adjust the head restraints.
are properly engaged. z Adjust the height of the seat belts 3 87.
z Sit with your buttocks as far back against z Adjust the lumbar support 3 so that it
the backrest as possible. Adjust the supports the natural shape of the spine.
distance between the seat and the
pedals so that your legs are slightly
angled when working the pedals.
Slide the passenger seat as far back
as possible.
68 Seats, interior

Heated front seats 3 Head restraints Adjusting the rear, centre head
Two buttons above the centre air vents for Adjusting the front head restraints and restraint 3
left and right seat. rear outboard head restraints 3 Pull the head restraint up or press the catch
With the ignition on, press button one or Press the button on the side and adjust the to release and then push the head restraint
more times to set the desired heat output height. down.
for each seat. The control indicator in the To fold down the backrests 3 71, or To fold down the backrest 3 71, or improve
button indicates which of the three heating improve visibility when the rear seats are visibility when the centre rear seat is not
levels is active. not occupied, remove the head restraints occupied, remove the head restraint or
We do not recommend prolonged use of or push them all the way down. push it all the way down.
the highest level for people with sensitive If the seats are occupied, set height If the seat is occupied, set height according
skin. according to body size. to body size.
To switch off: Press button repeatedly
until the control indicator in the button
goes out.
Seat heating is operational when the
engine is running.
Seats, interior 69

Adjusting the rear head restraints 3, Head restraint position Active head restraints 3 on front seats
Astra TwinTop In the event of a rear-end impact, the
Pull the head restraint up or press both 9 Warning active head restraints automatically tilt
catches to release and then push the head Do not drive the vehicle unless the head forwards slightly. The head is then more
restraint down. restraints are properly adjusted. effectively supported by the head restraint
To improve visibility when the rear seats and the danger of injury in the area of the
are not occupied, push the head restraints The middle of the head restraint should be cervical vertebra is reduced.
all the way down. at eye level. If this is not possible for Active head restraints can be identified by
extremely tall persons, set to highest the word ACTIVE.
If the seats are occupied, set height position, and set to lowest position for
according to body size. small persons.
Do not place any objects on the cover
behind the head restraints or between the
head restraints and the anti-roll bars 3.
70 Seats, interior

Removing Armrest 3 Armrest 3 in rear seat backrest,
Press and release the two catches. Pull and Armrest 3 at drivers seat saloon and estate
remove the head restraint. Push raised armrest backward against Fold down the armrest, pulling the strap
To fold down the backrests 3 3 71, push resistance and fold down. obliquely down (45).
the rear head restraints all the way down or The armrest can be moved to different When the centre rear seat is in use or the
remove. positions in stages by lifting it. rear backrests are folded, fold the armrest
Note up.
If the armrest is not required it can be
Only approved objects or components raised. A flap located behind the armrest
should be attached to the head restraint of facilitates transport of long, narrow
the unoccupied front passenger seat. Stowage compartment in armrest 3 106. objects 3 71.
Seats, interior 71

Armrest 3 in rear seat backrest, Extending the luggage Fold down centre backrest 3
Astra TwinTop compartment, Saloon Push head restraint down as far as
Pull the armrest by the strap, pivot it down Folding the rear seat backrests possible 3 68.
and position on the sit with the flat side up. Pushing rear head restraints all the way Disengage backrest using handle and fold
The armrest is held in place on the backrest down or removing 3 69, 3 70. onto seat cushion.
with a retaining strap. To fully remove the Slide front seat forward slightly. Folding down the centre seat backrest
armrest, disengage the bracket at the makes it possible to load longer objects.
retaining strap. Disengage the backrest (single or split 3)
using the pushbutton and fold it down onto The outer seats can still be used for
A flap located behind the armrest the seat cushion. occupants.
facilitates transport of long, narrow
objects 3 74. Return front seat to desired position.
72 Seats, interior

Restoring backrest to an upright position Extending the luggage Raise the seat cushion and fold the
Guide the seat belt through the side compartment, Estate backrest
bracket to protect against damage. Folding the rear seat backrests onto the Pull the strap on the seat cushion and lift
Catches must audibly engage when rear seat cushion the rear of the cushion forwards (split 3 or
seat backrests are raised. Pushing rear head restraints all the way one-piece).
The three-point seat belt for the centre rear down or removing 3 69, 3 70. Unhook Unhook hooks of luggage compartment
seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel hooks of luggage compartment cover from cover from head restraints 3 76.
if the backrest is properly engaged. head restraints 3 76.
Notes on loading Slide front seat forward slightly.

3 83. Disengage the backrest (single or split 3)
using the pushbutton and fold it down onto
the seat cushion.
Return front seat to desired position.
Seats, interior 73

Remove rear outer head restraints. Push Disengage backrest (one-piece or split 3) Fold down centre backrest 3
centre head restraint all the way down using pushbuttons, fold forward and Push head restraint down as far as
3 69, 3 70. engage. possible 3 68.
Stow the removed head restraints in the Disengage backrest using handle and fold
cavity below the raised seat cushions. onto seat cushion. If the seat cushion is
raised, fold it forward until it engages.
Folding the centre seat backrest makes it
possible to load longer objects. The outer
seats can still be used for occupants.
74 Seats, interior

Restoring the backrests or seat With the seat cushions raised: insert and Extending the luggage
cushions 3 to their original position adjust head restraints in backrests 3 69, compartment, Astra TwinTop
Guide the seat belt through the side 3 70. Fold back seat cushions, making sure Loading area between rear seats
bracket to protect against damage. the belt buckles are properly positioned. Pull out the armrest by the strap.
To restore the backrest to an upright Attach hooks of luggage compartment The armrest is held in place on the backrest
position, fold up, pressing the button on cover to head restraints 3 76. with a retaining strap. To fully remove the
the backrest. Audibly engage the backrest The three-point seat belt for the centre rear armrest, disengage the bracket at the
in an upright position. seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel retaining strap.
if the backrest is properly engaged. Pull the handle and fold down the cover.
Safety net 3
3 77.
Notes on loading
3 83.
Seats, interior 75

Cover behind armrest can be locked from Tilt front passenger seat backrest Luggage compartment cover
luggage compartment 3: turn handle 90: forward 3 Saloon
Locked = Horizontal handle To push down and remove front passenger Removing
seat head restraint, 3 69, 3 70. Unhook retaining straps from tailgate.
Unlocked = Vertical handle
Push front passenger seat back. Pull cover from the side guides.
Notes on loading
3 83. Fold front passenger seat forward by Fitting
raising release lever. Engage cover in side guides and fold
downwards. Attach retaining straps to
Move front passenger seat backrest
tailgate.
upright
Push release lever forwards, move front
passenger seat backrest upright and
audibly engage.
Notes on loading
3 83.
76 Seats, interior

Estate To cover the gap between the luggage Removing
To open compartment cover and the rear Open the luggage compartment cover and
Press handle on luggage compartment backrests, there is a cover on the cartridge. detach the hooks from the head restraints.
cover down. The cover automatically Attach the two hooks of the cover to the Raise release lever at right side of luggage
unrolls. head restraint guide rods. If the safety net compartment cover. Lift right side of cover
To close is mounted, run the hooks through the net first, then pull left side out of recess.
Press handle on luggage compartment mesh.
Fitting
cover rearwards; the cover automatically Insert luggage compartment cover into
engages in its end position. recess on left, raise release lever on right
Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged side, insert cover into recess on right,
objects on the cover. engage and push lever down.
Attach the hooks on the head restraints -
see Fig. 17079 T.
Seats, interior 77

Safety net 3, Estate Adjust strap length on safety net by Fitting behind front seats
The safety net can be mounted behind the attaching the upper hook to the eye of the Lift up rear seat cushions 3 72.
rear seats or, if the rear seat backrests are strap, see illustration 17085 T, and attach Unroll the safety net.
folded and the seat cushions raised, to eyes in the right and left of the floor.
There are two brackets in the roof frame
behind the front seats.
above the front seats. Hook the net rods
Passengers must not be carried behind the into the brackets on one side and then the
safety net. other. Slide forward to engage.
Fitting behind the rear seats Adjust strap length on safety net by
Remove luggage compartment cover 3 75. attaching the upper hook to the eye of the
Unroll the safety net. strap, see illustration 17085 T, and attach
to eyes in the right and left of the floor.
There are two brackets in the roof frame.
Hook the net rods into the brackets on one Remove rear outer head restraints and fold
side and then the other. Slide forward to backrests forward 3 69, 3 70, 3 72.
engage.
78 Seats, interior

Removing Luggage compartment grille 3, Lock grille in open position.
Detach the safety net belt straps by tipping Delivery Van To close the grille section from the open
up the length adjuster. To transport long objects, part of the position, push bracket down, fold down
Unhook the safety net rods from the luggage compartment grille behind the grille and engage, see Fig.
brackets in the roof frame. Roll up the net passenger seat can be opened: Check that the closed grille is properly
and secure with a strap. Release passenger seat back and fold locked.
forward.
Press bracket down and fold grille
section up.
Seats, interior 79

Lashing eyes 3 Rails and hooks in the luggage FlexOrganizer 3
in the luggage compartment are used to compartment 3, Estate Flexible system for dividing the luggage
secure lashing straps 3 or a luggage net 3 The side walls of the luggage compartment compartment or securing loads in an
to prevent objects that are being house two rails. Insert the hooks in the Estate.
transported from sliding. desired position in the rails: insert the hook The system consists of,
in the upper groove on the rail and press in
the lower groove. z adapters,
Pull off the hook to remove. z variable partition net,
z mesh pockets for the side walls,
z hooks in the luggage compartment.
Components are mounted in the two guide
rails in the side walls of the luggage
compartment by means of adapters or
hooks.
80 Seats, interior

Variable partition net Hooks and mesh pockets for side walls Cargo box 3
Insert an adapter in each rail: Fold up Insert hooks in rails in desired position: Foldable box under the floor cover used to
handle plate, insert adapter in upper and insert hook in upper groove in rail and push divide the luggage compartment.
lower groove of rails, move to desired into lower groove. The mesh pocket can be
position. To lock the adapter, swivel the suspended from the hooks. The cargo box may only be loaded when
handle plate up. Compress the rods of the the backrests are engaged in an upright
Removing position.
partition net slightly and insert in Press the partition net rods together and
corresponding openings of the adapter. remove from the adapters. To remove the cargo box floor cover,
The longer rod must be inserted in the remove first the right half then the left half.
upper adapter. Adapter: fold open the retainer, release the For models with towing equipment, first
adapter from the lower groove and remove release the coupling ball bar fixing strap
from the upper groove. and thread this through the eye 3 223.
Release the hooks from the rails. Install in reverse order.
Seats, interior 81

Luggage compartment blind, Easy Load z Briefly press loading aid button: The
Astra TwinTop folded roof is raised. The roof remains in
(Electronically operated loading this end position for approx. 9 minutes.
To open aid for the luggage compartment
Release luggage compartment blind from of the Astra TwinTop) 6
recesses on left and right, blind rolls up The loading aid makes it possible to
automatically. comfortably load the luggage
To close compartment when the roof is open. The
Grasp the handle, pull the blind towards press of a button will raise the roof folded
the rear of the vehicle and engage in the up in the luggage compartment 25 cm.
recess on the right and left. This enlarges the load opening of the
Do not place any objects on the luggage luggage compartment.
compartment blind. z Open the boot lid.
There must be no objects outside of or on z Unhook luggage compartment blind
top of the luggage compartment blind and attach to rear window frame with
when the roof is open or in the process of holder, see Fig.
opening.
The roof can only be operated with the
luggage compartment blind engaged in
the recess.
82 Seats, interior
z Only close the boot lid once the

9 Warning confirmation signal has sounded to
indicate that the loading aid is in its
Take care when operating the loading lower end position.
aid. Risk of injury.
Make sure that nothing can become z If the loading aid is not in its lower end
trapped. position when the boot lid is closed, a
warning tone sounds or the boot lid is
Make sure no one is in the action zone blocked mechanically 3 3 61.
during operation. Risk of injury.
This is especially important for children. z Do not touch moving parts.
Inform passengers accordingly. z One minute before the end of the hold
time for the raised loading aid, a
Note warning buzzer will sound to remind you
z Do not place objects on or near the to lower the roof.
z Load luggage compartment at most to luggage compartment blind.
z The loading aid is only operable when
marked load height, otherwise the roof z The folded roof can only be lowered the vehicle is unlocked.
and load could be damaged. when the blind is closed. Otherwise, a
z Frequent operation of the loading aid
z Suspend the luggage compartment warning buzzer will sound three times.
with the engine off runs the battery
blind from the rear window frame, and z The movement of the tilted roof can be down.
engage in recesses on right and left. The stopped by pressing the loading aid
z Repeated operation of the loading aid
luggage compartment blind must be button and another longer press
without breaks can cause overloading
flat; objects underneath it must not push reverses the direction of the movement.
and therefore malfunctions.
it upwards.
z A confirmation buzzer is heard in the
z Briefly press loading aid button: The upper and lower roof end positions when
folded roof is lowered. the roof is tilted.
z Close the boot lid only after the
confirmation signal has sounded.
Otherwise the roof could be damaged.
Seats, interior 83
z Estate: fit safety net 3 when objects are z Astra TwinTop: Do not place any objects
being transported in the luggage on the cover of the deployable anti-roll
compartment 3 77. bars 3, behind the rear head restraints
z Estate: close luggage compartment or in the luggage compartment outside
cover 3 75. of, on or next to the luggage
compartment cover.
z If the backrests are not folded down
when transporting objects in the z Do not place objects in the expansion
luggage compartment, they must be range of airbags or extending anti-roll
engaged in their upright position 3 bars 3, since this poses a risk of injury if
3 72, 3 74. the systems are actuated.
z Do not allow the load to protrude above z Do not drive with luggage compartment
the upper edge of the backrests. open when transporting bulky objects,
for example, since toxic exhaust fumes
Picture no: 17093t.tif z Astra TwinTop: pay attention to could penetrate the interior.
Notes on loading the vehicle maximum loading height with roof open
z The payload is the difference between
z Heavy objects in the luggage 3 81, Fig. 17973 T. Do not place objects
on top of or next to the luggage the permitted gross vehicle weight
compartment should be placed against (see identification plate 3 292) and
the engaged rear seat backrests or, if the compartment blind.
the EC kerb weight.
rear seat backrests are folded down 3, z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit
against the front seat backrests. If (cushion) 3 must always be freely z To calculate the EC kerb weight,
stacking objects, put the heavier objects accessible. enter the data on page 311.
at the bottom.
z Do not place any objects in front of the
z Secure heavy objects with lashing rear window or on the instrument panel.
straps 3 attached to lashing eyes 3 79.
z The load must not obstruct the operation
of the pedals, the handbrake or the
gears or restrict the drivers freedom of
movement. Do not place loose objects in
the interior.
84 Seats, interior
z The EC kerb weight includes weights for Three-stage safety system

the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all Comprising: 9 Warning
fluids (tank 90 % full).
z Three-point seat belts. The airbag systems serve to supplement
z Optional equipment and accessories the three-point seat belts and belt
increase the kerb weight. z Belt tensioners at the front seats.
tensioners. The seat belts must therefore
z Weights and payload 3 311. z Airbag systems for driver, front seat always be worn. Disregard of these
passenger and rear outboard seats 3. instructions could lead to injuries or
z Driving with a roof load increases the On Astra TwinTop 3, roll-over bar endanger life. Vehicle passengers
sensitivity of the vehicle to cross-winds behind rear seats. should be informed accordingly.
and has a detrimental effect on vehicle
handling due to the vehicles higher The three stages are activated in sequence
depending on the severity of the accident: Always observe the instructions supplied
centre of gravity. Distribute the load with the child restraint system..
evenly and secure it properly with z The automatic seat belt locking devices
retaining straps. Adjust the tyre pressure prevent the belt strap from being pulled
to the load conditions. Do not drive out and thus ensure that the vehicle
faster than 120 km/h. Check and occupants are retained in their seats.
retighten the straps frequently.
Observe country-specific regulations. z The front seat belts are pulled down at
the belt buckles. This means the belts fit
z The permissible roof load is 75 kg and snugly, the occupants are decelerated
100 kg for caravan with roof railing. The early with the vehicle and the load on the
roof load is the combined weight of the body is reduced.
roof rack and the load.
z In the event of a severe accident, the
airbag systems and deployable anti-roll
bars 3 also deploy, forming safety
cushions for the occupants. The front
airbags are inflated in two stages based
on the severity of the collision.
Seats, interior 85
9 Warning
Fasten your seat belt before every

journey.
In the event of an accident, persons not
wearing seat belts endanger their fellow
occupants and themselves.
Control indicator for the seat belt X 3

3 110.
Seat belts are only intended for one person.
They are not suitable for anyone under
12 years of age or under 150 cm tall.
Three-point seat belts For children up to the age of 12 we Belt tensioners
With their automatic retractors, the spring- recommend the Opel child restraint The front seat belts are pulled down at
tensioned seat belts always ensure a snug system 3 88. the buckles in the event of a front or rear
fit against the body. Belt force limiters impact above a certain severity. This
Information concerning the correct seat In the front seats, the load on the body is tightens the seat belts.
position 3 67. reduced through dampened release of the Actuation of belt tensioners
belt during a collision. is indicated by illumination of control
The seat belts are locked during heavy
acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle. Checking the seat belts indicator v, see next column.
This prevents extension of the seat belt Check all parts of the belt system Deployed belt tensioners must be replaced
from the retractor and holds the occupant periodically for damage and function. by a workshop. Belt tensioners can only be
in his or her seat. Replace damaged components. After an deployed once.
accident, have the seat belts and deployed
belt tensioners replaced by a workshop.
Make sure that seat belts are not damaged
or trapped by sharp-edged objects.
86 Seats, interior
z The belt tensioner and airbag system

9 Warning control electronics can be found in the
centre console area. In order to avoid
Have the cause of the fault eliminated malfunctions, do not store magnetic
immediately by a workshop. objects in this area.
The systems integrated self-diagnostics z When the rear seats are being used,
allows faults to be quickly remedied. please ensure that the components of
Important the front seat belts are not damaged by
z Do not affix or place accessories and shoes or other objects. Do not allow dirt
other objects in the action zone of the to penetrate the automatic retractors of
belt tensioners. Do not make any the seat belts.
modifications to belt tensioner z We recommend that you have the front
components as this will render the seats removed by a workshop.
Picture no: 17105t.tif vehicle unroadworthy.
Control indicator v for belt tensioners z The belt tensioners trigger once only,
The functionality of the belt tensioners is 9 Warning indicated by illumination of control
monitored electronically together with the indicator v. Belt tensioners when
airbag systems and the anti-roll bars 3 and Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or triggered must be replaced by a
is indicated by the control indicator v. fitting of seat belts or belt buckles) can workshop.
The control indicator illuminates for actuate the belt tensioners, with risk of z When disposing of the vehicle, the
approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is injury. safety instructions given for this must
switched on. If it does not illuminate, does be observed. Take the vehicle to a
not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates recycling company for disposal.
while driving there is a fault in the belt
tensioner system, the airbag systems or the
anti-roll bars 3 3 95. The systems may not
activate in the event of an accident.
Deployment of the belt tensioners is
indicated by continuous illumination of v.
Seats, interior 87

Operating the seat belts Height adjustment 3
9 Warning Adjusting the height of the upper
Fitting seat belts
The seat belt must not be twisted and On pregnant women in particular, the deflection point of the front seat belts:
must fit snug against the body. The lap belt must be positioned as low as 1. Pull out seat belt a little way.
backrest must not be tilted back too possible across the pelvis so as not to 2. Press down button on adjuster slide.
far (max. approx. 25). put too much pressure on the abdomen.
3. Adjust the height.
Adjust height so that the belt runs across Loose or bulky clothing prevents the belt
the shoulder. It must not run across the from fitting snugly. Do not place objects 4. Allow sliding adjuster to audibly latch.
throat or upper arm. such as handbags or mobile phones Do not adjust height while driving.
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and between the belt and your body.
guide it across the body, making sure it is
not twisted. Insert the latch plate into the 9 Warning
buckle. Tension the lap belt frequently
while driving by tugging the shoulder belt. The belt must not rest against hard or
fragile objects in the pockets of your
clothing.
88 Seats, interior
Three-point seat belts on rear outer seats Child restraint system 3

Lead seat belts through holders 3 at side if Follow the usage instructions for the child
they are not being used 3 72, Fig. 17063 T. restraint system.
Three-point seat belt of centre rear seat 3 Always comply with local or national
The seat belt can only be pulled off the reel regulations. In some countries, use of child
if the rear seat backrests are upright and restraint systems is forbidden on certain
are engaged in their retainers 3 71. seats.
Three-point seat belts of rear seats in Selecting the right system
Astra TwinTop Your child should travel facing backwards
To prevent the seat belts from making in the car for as long as possible. A child
flapping noise when the sun roof and/or has a very weak cervical spinal column and
the windows are open, the seat belts of in the event of an accident is less likely to
unoccupied rear seats can be secured suffer injury in a rearward-facing, semi-
Picture no: 17109t.tif behind the armrest.
Removing the belt lying position than if seated upright.
To release belt, press red button on belt
buckle. 9 Warning
Never carry child restraint systems on

your lap, risk of fatal injury.
Seats, interior 89
Permissible options for fitting a child safety seat1) B1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy
recognition and Opel child restraint
Weight and On front On outer On centre system with transponders.
age class2) passenger seat rear seats rear seat3) If the child restraint system is being
Group 0: secured using a three-point seat
up to 10 kg belt, move seat height adjustment 3
or approx. to uppermost position. Move front
10 months passenger seat as far back as
B 1, + U, + U possible and move front passenger
Group 0+: seat belt anchorage point to lowest
up to 13 kg position.
or approx.
2 years B2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy
recognition and Opel child restraint
Group I: system with transponders.
9 to18 kg If the child restraint system is being
or approx. B 2, + U, + U secured using a three-point seat
8 months to belt, move seat height adjustment 3
4 years to uppermost position. Move front
Group II: passenger seat as far back as
15 to 25 kg possible so that vehicle safety belt
or approx. runs from anchorage point towards
3 to 7 years the front.
X U U U = Universal suitability in conjunction
Group III:
22 to 36 kg with three-point seat belt.
or approx. + = Vehicle seat with ISOFIX fixings
6 to 12 years available. When using ISOFIX, only
ISOFIX child restraint systems
approved for the vehicle may be
used.
X = No child restraint system permitted
in this weight class.
1)
For reasons of safety, we recommend that the child safety seat be installed on one of the outer
rear seats.
2)
We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit.
3)
Not on Astra TwinTop.
90 Seats, interior
Note z Do not stick anything on the child

z Children under 12 years or less than restraint systems and do not cover them
150 cm tall should always travel in an with any other materials.
appropriate child restraint system. z Only allow the child to enter and exit on
z When transporting children, use the child the side of the vehicle facing away from
restraint systems suitable for the childs the road.
weight. z A child restraint system which has been
z Ensure correct installation of child subjected to stress in an accident must
restraint system, see the instructions be replaced.
enclosed with the system. z Secure or remove child restraint systems
z The covers of the Opel child restraint carried in the vehicle when not in use.
system can be wiped clean.
Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX
child restraint systems
The mounting brackets for ISOFIX child
restraint systems are located between the
seat backrest and the seat base.
Only attach ISOFIX child restraint systems
approved for your vehicle to the mounting
brackets.
Please follow the instructions
accompanying the ISOFIX child restraint
system.
Seats, interior 91
Exception:
Front passenger seat with seat occupancy
recognition 3. The seat occupancy
recognition system deactivates the front
and side airbags 3 for the front passenger
if the front passenger seat is unoccupied or
an Opel child restraint system with
transponders 3 has been fitted to the front
passenger seat. Seat occupancy
recognition 3 96. Opel child restraint
system with transponders 3 3 88.
Examples of events triggering the front
airbag system:
Picture no: 17111t.tif Picture no: 17112t.tif z impact against a non-yielding obstacle:
Airbag system z seat occupancy recognition 3, the front airbags are triggered at low
vehicle speed,
Front airbag z the control indicator for Opel child
The front airbag system consists of one restraint systems y with transponders 3 z impact against a yielding obstacle (such
airbag in the steering wheel and one in the in the instrument panel. as another vehicle): the front airbags are
instrument panel. The airbags can be only triggered at a higher vehicle speed.
The front airbag system will be triggered:
identified by the word AIRBAG.
z depending on the severity of the
The front airbag system comprises: accident,
z an airbag with inflator in the steering
z depending on the type of impact,
wheel and a second one in the
instrument panel, z within the range shown in the illustration,
z control electronics with impact sensors, z independent of side airbag 3 and
curtain airbag system 3.
z control light for airbag systems v in
instrument panel, The ignition must be switched on.
92 Seats, interior

When triggered, the front airbags inflate in The front airbag system will not be
milliseconds to form a safety cushion for 9 Warning triggered in the event of
the driver and front passenger. The Optimal protection is only provided if z the ignition is switched off,
forward movement of the front seat the seat is in the proper position 3 67. z minor frontal collisions,
occupants is checked, thereby
substantially reducing the risk of injury to Do not place any body parts or objects z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
the upper body and head. in the area in which the airbags inflate.
z collisions involving a side or rear impact,
The front airbag system serves to
No impairment of view will occur, because supplement the three-point seat belt. that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to
the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly Seat belts must therefore be correctly the occupants.
that it is often not even noticed in an fitted.
accident. In addition, the front airbag system will not
be triggered for the front passenger in
versions with seat occupancy recognition 3
if
z the front passenger seat is unoccupied,
z if there is a properly installed Opel child
restraint system with transponders 3.
Seat occupancy recognition 3 96.
Opel child restraint system with
transponders 3 3 88.
Seats, interior 93

Side airbag 3 The side airbag system will be triggered: When triggered, the side airbag inflates
The side airbag system consists of an z depending on the severity of the within milliseconds to form a safety cushion
airbag in each front seat backrest. accident, for the driver or front passenger in the
The airbags can be identified by the z depending on the type of impact, respective door area. This substantially
word AIRBAG. reduces the risk of injury to the upper body
z within the range shown in the illustration and pelvis in the event of a side-on collision.
The side airbag system comprises: on the centre door pillar of the drivers
z an airbag with inflator in the back of or front passenger side,
the drivers and front passenger seat
respectively, z independently of the front airbag
system.
z the control electronics,
The ignition must be switched on.
z the side impact sensors,
Exception:
z control light for airbag systems v in Front passenger seat with seat occupancy
instrument panel, recognition 3. The seat occupancy
z seat occupancy recognition 3, recognition system deactivates the front
z the control indicator for Opel child and side airbags 3 for the front passenger
restraint systems y with transponders 3 if the front passenger seat is unoccupied
in the instrument panel. or an Opel child restraint system with
transponders 3 has been fitted to the
front passenger seat. Seat occupancy
recognition 3 96. Opel child restraint
system with transponders 3 3 88.
94 Seats, interior
9 Warning
Do not place any body parts or objects

in the area in which the airbags inflate.
The side airbags will not be triggered in the

event of
z the ignition is switched off,
z frontal collisions,
z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
z collisions involving a rear impact,
z side-on collisions outside the passenger Picture no: 17115t.tif Picture no: 17114t.tif
cell. Curtain airbag 3 The curtain airbag system will be triggered:
In addition, the side airbag system 3 will The curtain airbag system consists of an z depending on the severity of the
not be triggered for the front passenger in airbag in the roof frame on each side. This accident,
versions with seat occupancy recognition 3 can be identified by the word AIRBAG on z depending on the type of impact,
if the roof pillar.
z the front passenger seat is unoccupied, z within the range shown in the illustration
The curtain airbag system comprises: on the centre door pillar of the drivers or
z if there is a properly installed Opel child z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame front passenger side,
restraint system with transponders 3. on the drivers and front passenger side
Seat occupancy recognition 3 96. respectively, z together with the side airbag system 3,
Opel child restraint system with z the control electronics, z irrespective of seat occupancy
transponders 3 3 88. recognition 3,
z the side impact sensors,
z independently of the front airbag
z control light for airbag systems v in system.
instrument panel.
The ignition must be switched on.
Seats, interior 95
9 Warning
Do not place any body parts or objects

in the area in which the airbags inflate.
The curtain airbags will not be triggered in
the event of
z the ignition is switched off,
z frontal collisions,
z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
z collisions involving a rear impact,
z side-on collisions outside the passenger
Picture no: 17351t.tif cell. Picture no: 17105t.tif
When the curtain airbag is triggered it Control indicator v for airbag systems
inflates within milliseconds and provides a The functionality of the airbag systems is
safety barrier in the head area on the monitored electronically together with the
respective side of the vehicle. This reduces seat occupancy recognition system 3, the
the risk of injury to the head considerably in belt tensioners and the anti-roll bars 3 and
case of a side impact. is indicated by the control indicator v. The
control indicator illuminates for approx.
4 seconds when the ignition is switched on.
If it does not illuminate, does not go off
after 4 seconds or illuminates while driving
there is a fault in the airbag systems, the
seat occupancy recognition system 3, the
belt tensioner or the anti-roll bars 3 3 86.
The systems may not activate in the event
of an accident.
Deployment of the airbags is indicated by
continuous illumination of v.
96 Seats, interior
Seat occupancy recognition 3

9 Warning The seat occupancy recognition system
deactivates the front and side airbags 3
Have the cause of the fault eliminated for the front passenger if the front
immediately by a workshop. passenger seat is not occupied or an Opel
The systems integrated self-diagnostics child restraint system with transponders 3
allows faults to be quickly remedied. is fitted on the front passenger seat. The
curtain airbag system 3 remains activated.
The control indicator y for seat
occupancy recognition is located in the
instrument panel. If the control indicator y
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when
the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is
equipped with seat occupancy recognition, Picture no: 17116t.tif
see next page, Fig. 17117 T. Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
If an Opel child restraint system with are also identified by a sticker on the lower
transponders 3 is fitted, the control panel of the front passenger seats, see
indicator y lights permanently after illustration above.
the ignition is switched on as soon as Opel child restraint systems with
the system has detected the child restraint transponders 3 are automatically detected
system. Only then may the child restraint if correctly fitted to the front passenger seat.
system with transponders 3 be used on the When this type of child restraint system is in
passenger seat. use on the front passenger seat, the front
and side airbag systems for the front
passenger seat are deactivated. The
curtain airbag system remains activated.
Pay attention to control indicator y for
seat occupancy recognition 3 3 97.
Seats, interior 97
Control indicator y for Opel child

9 Warning restraint systems with transponders 3
The presence of an Opel child restraint
Only Opel child restraint systems with system with transponders 3 is indicated
transponders 3 should be fitted on the after the ignition has been switched on by
front passenger seats. Use of systems permanent illumination of the control
without transponders poses a risk of indicator y in the instrument panel, as
fatal injury. soon as the seat occupancy recognition
Opel child restraint systems with system has detected the child restraint
transponders 3 can be identified by a system.
sticker.
Note
On the Astra TwinTop, there may be
interference in radio reception of certain Picture no: 17117t.tif
frequencies in the medium waveband If the control indicator does not come on
when the roof is open and the front while driving, the front and side airbags 3
passenger seat is unoccupied. for the passenger are not de-activated and
there is a risk of injury or death to the child.
Fit child restraint systems on the rear seat.
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a
workshop.
If the child restraint system is not correctly
installed or the transponder is faulty, the
control indicator flashes. Check for correct
installation of child restraint system. To
install the child restraint system with
transponders 3, see the instructions
enclosed with the system.
98 Seats, interior
If the control indicator flashes when the Important z Do not bond or use other material to
child restraint system with transponders 3 z Do not affix or place accessories or other cover the steering wheel, dashboard,
is correctly fitted, there is a fault with risk of objects within the expansion range of front seat backrests and roof frame in
injury to the child. Fit child restraint systems airbag systems or extending anti-roll the area of the airbags and the seat
on the rear seat. Have the cause of the bars 3 is not permitted, since this could cushion of the passenger seat or the
fault eliminated by a workshop. result in injuries if the components are covers of the deployable anti-roll bars 3.
If no Opel child restraint system with actuated. z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to
transponders 3 is fitted, the control z Do not place any objects between the clean the steering wheel, instrument
indicator must not light or flash as the airbag systems/anti-roll bar covers 3 panel, front seat backrests, roof frame
passenger airbag systems would not and the occupants. Risk of injury. and seat cushion of the front passenger
deploy. Have the cause of the fault seat. Do not use any aggressive cleaning
eliminated by a workshop. 9 Warning agents.
Never carry child restraint systems or z Only protective covers which are
9 Warning approved for your vehicle with side
other objects on your lap - risk of fatal
If the Opel child restraint system with injury. airbag 3 may be fitted on the front
transponders 3 has been fitted seats. When fitting the protective covers,
according to the instructions, the control z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to make sure that the airbag units on the
indicator for Opel restraint systems with hang up light articles of clothing or coat outboard sides of the front seat
transponders must illuminate in the hangers. Do not place any objects in the backrests are not covered.
instrument panel when the ignition is pockets of the hanging items risk of z The airbag systems are actuated
switched on. injury. independently of each other based on
If the control indicator does not come on z The control electronics of the airbag the severity of the accident and the type
while driving, the airbag systems for the systems, belt tensioners and deployable of impact. The side airbag system 3 and
passenger are not de-activated and anti-roll bars 3 are located in the centre the curtain airbag system 3 are
there is a risk of fatal injury. In this case, console area. Do not store any magnetic triggered together.
fit child restraint systems on the rear objects in the area as they could cause z Astra TwinTop: The deployable anti-roll
seat. Have the cause of the fault malfunction. bars 3 are deployed together with the
eliminated by a workshop. front and side airbag systems 3
depending on the severity of the impact.
Child restraint system 3 88.
Seats, interior 99
z Each airbag or deployable roll-over z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety z In order to prevent malfunctions when
bar 3 deploys once only. Have a instructions given for this must be using an Opel child restraint system with
workshop replace deployed airbags observed. Take the vehicle to a recycling transponders 3 on the front passenger
immediately. company for disposal. seat, no objects (e.g. plastic sheet,
z The speeds, directions of movement and z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should stickers or heated mats) may be placed
deformation properties of the vehicles, only travel on the rear seats. This does under the child restraint system.
and the properties of the obstacle not apply to children who are travelling
concerned, determine the severity of the in child restraint systems with 9 Warning
accident and triggering of the airbags. transponders 3. Child restraint systems as well as other
The degree of damage to your vehicle z In vehicles with seat occupancy objects must never be carried on the
and the resulting repair costs alone are recognition 3, do not place any heavy lap of passengers. If carried in this
not indicative that the criteria for objects on the front passenger seat way, child restraint systems with
triggering of the airbags were met. otherwise the airbag systems for the transponders 3 in vehicles with seat
z Do not make any modifications to front passenger seat may be triggered in occupancy recognition 3 could lead to
components of the airbag systems or the the event of an accident. front passenger airbag systems failing
anti-roll bars 3 as this would render the to trigger in the event of an accident.
z In vehicles with seat occupancy
vehicle unroadworthy. recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions
do not use protective covers or seat
9 Warning cushions on the front passenger seat.
The systems can be triggered abruptly
and cause injury if they are handled
improperly.
z We recommend having the steering

wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling
parts, the door seals, the handles and
the seats removed by a workshop.
100 Seats, interior

Use of child restraint systems 3 on the Version with side airbag system 3 is Use of child restraint systems 3 on
front passenger seat in vehicles with indicated by AIRBAG text on outer side front passenger seat in vehicles with
airbag systems, but without seat of front seat backrests. airbag-systems and seat occupancy
occupancy recognition 3 Seat occupancy recognition 3 3 96. recognition 3
9 Warning 9 Warning
No child restraint system 3 may be Only Opel child restraint systems with
installed on front passenger seat. transponders 3 can be fitted on the
Danger to life. front passenger seats. Use of systems
without transponders poses a risk of
Vehicles with a front passenger airbag are fatal injury.
marked with AIRBAG above the glove
compartment and a warning sticker on the Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
side of the instrument panel, which is visible are marked with a sticker on the bottom
when the front passenger door is open. panel of the front passenger seat.
Seats, interior 101
Rollover protection system 3

The Astra TwinTop is equipped with
rollover protection with reinforced
windscreen frame and anti-roll bars behind
the rear seat head restraints. Depending
on the variant, the anti-roll bars are either
fixed or deploy automatically in the event
of an impact of a certain severity. The
subsequent description only regards the
variant with automatically deployed anti-
roll bars 3.

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition Opel child restraint systems with
can also be identified by control transponders 3 are marked with a sticker
indicator y in the instrument panel. or sew-on badge, see illustration.
If control indicator y illuminates for
approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is
switched on, the vehicle is equipped with
seat occupancy recognition 3 96.
The seat occupancy recognition system
detects Opel child restraint systems with
transponders 3 and deactivates the front
and side airbag systems 3 for the front
passenger seat. The curtain airbag
system 3 remains activated. For seat
occupancy recognition 3 96.
102 Seats, interior

In the event of a rollover, the anti-roll Control indicator v for extending Extended anti-roll bars
bars deploy upwards in a matter of anti-roll bars can be retracted (e.g. in order to close the
milliseconds. They also deploy together The functionality of the anti-roll bars is roof after a collision).
with the front and side airbag systems 3, monitored electronically together with the Press the lever between the rods of an anti-
helping to optimise occupant protection. belt tensioners and the airbag systems, roll bar to unlock the system. Push the anti-
The system deploys with the roof open or and is indicated by the control indicator v roll bar all the way down until it engaged.
closed. If the anti-roll bars are extended in the instrument cluster. When the ignition Fit the cover.
the roof must not be operated, see is switched on the control indicator
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does Repeat the procedure on the other anti-roll
instructions on following page. bar.
not illuminate or does not go off after
4 seconds, or illuminates while driving, Control indicator v, however, will remain
either there is a fault or the anti-roll bars, illuminated and the anti-roll bars will not
the belt tensioner or the airbag systems deploy in the event of another collision.
have been actuated 3 86. The systems
may not activate in the event of an
accident.
Actuation of the anti-roll bars is indicated
by continuous illumination of v.
Seats, interior 103
Have the cause of the fault eliminated Note

immediately by a workshop. z Do not place any objects on the covers of
the anti-roll bars behind the head
9 Warning restraints. They would be propelled
through the vehicle in an uncontrolled
The roof cannot be closed or opened if fashion should the anti-roll bars deploy.
the anti-roll bars are extended. The anti- Such objects could also prevent the anti-
roll bars must first be retracted. roll bars from extending.
After deployment of the anti-roll bar,
z Do not operate the roof while the anti-
have the system repaired by a workshop
roll bars are extended. Parts of the roof
immediately.
could be damaged during such
Manually retracted anti-roll bars will not operation.
deploy in the event of a collision.
z Deployment of the anti-roll bars is
indicated by illumination of control Picture no: 17094t.tif
indicator v. Cigarette lighter 3
z If an attempt is made to operate the roof The cigarette lighter is in the front centre
while the anti-roll bars are extended, a console, beneath the ashtray cover.
continuous signal will sound as a The ashtray cover opens when pressed at
warning. the point indicated.
104 Seats, interior

Press in the cigarette lighter. Switches off Accessory sockets 3 Estates have an additional accessory
automatically once the element is hot. Pull Some vehicles have an accessory socket for socket 3 in the luggage compartment.
out the cigarette lighter. the connection of electrical accessories Do not exceed the maximum power
instead of a cigarette lighter. Use of the consumption of 120 watts.
accessory socket while the engine is not
Electrical accessories connected
running will discharge the battery.
to the socket must comply with
Caution the electromagnetic compatibility
requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839,
Do not damage the sockets by using otherwise vehicle malfunctions may occur.
unsuitable plugs. Do not connect any current-delivering
accessories, e.g. electrical charging
devices or batteries.
Seats, interior 105

Ashtray 3 To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray Rear ashtray 3
insert at the spots illustrated and pull The ashtray is in the rear centre console.
Caution upwards. Pull out the ashtray by pushing on one of
To be used only for ash and not for the sides.
combustible rubbish.
Ashtray, front
The ashtray is in the front centre console
beneath a cover.
The cover opens when pressed at the point
indicated.
106 Seats, interior

To empty, open the ashtray, press the Stowage compartments Stowage compartment in front armrest 3
spring in the direction of the arrow and pull Glove compartment To open, press button and open upper part
the ashtray straight out rearwards. To open, pull handle upwards. of armrest.
Foldaway tables 3 The glove compartment shelf 3 can be
on the front seat backrests. removed: Disengage the shelf by pulling on
Open by pulling upward until it engages. the front edge.
Fold away by pressing down past the Refit the shelf by sliding it into the side
resistance point. guide strips and engage it in the rear panel
by pushing.
Do not place any heavy objects on the
table. The inside of the lid also houses a pen
holder and a place to store coins.
The glove compartment should be closed
while driving.
Seats, interior 107
Stowage nets and pockets 3 Sun visors

Storage nets or pockets are found on the Use the sun visor to protect from glare by
back of the front seat backrests. pulling it down and swivelling it to the
side 3.
Drinks holders 3
Drink holders are located in the centre The covers of the mirrors in the sun visors
console behind the handbrake lever and in should be closed while driving.
the door pockets of the rear doors. On vehicles with panoramic windscreen 3,
There are additional drink holders in the close the sun visors before moving the roof
fold-down tables 3 on the back of the front lining.
seat backrests.

Stowage compartment for glasses 3
On drivers side: fold down to open.
Do not store heavy objects in the stowage
compartment.
Stowage compartment in luggage
compartment, estate 3
There is another stowage compartment at
the right side of the luggage compartment
in the estate.
Secure objects in luggage compartment to
prevent them from sliding.
Cargo box 3
3 80.
108 Instruments, controls
Instruments, controls
Picture no: 18624t.tif Picture no:

Control indicators The electronic key is in the wrong
Control indicators ................................ 108 The control indicators described here are location in the vehicle interior (do not
not present in all vehicles. The description put key in luggage compartment or
Instrument display ............................... 115
applies to all instrument versions. in front of information display), or
Information display ............................. 118 the electronic key is not in the vehicle
Warning buzzers.................................. 135 The control indicator colours mean: interior, or influence from an external
Windscreen wipers............................... 136 z Red Danger, important reminder, interference source (radio masts,
z Yellow interfering transmitters in the
Warning, note, fault,
vicinity).
z Green On confirmation, or
z Blue On confirmation. Electronic key failure, emergency
operation 3 35.
0 If the battery in the electronic key needs
Open&Start system 3 changing, InSP3 appears in the service
Control indicator illuminates or flashes display or, in vehicles with check control 3,
yellow. an appropriate message appears in the
If it flashes information display 3 37, 3 116.
System has not detected electronic key in
vehicle interior. The reasons for this may be:
Instruments, controls 109
Illuminated
I 9 Warning
Fault in Open&Start system.
Engine oil pressure
Lock or unlock vehicle using remote control Control indicator illuminates red. When the engine is off, considerably
or emergency key if necessary 3 41, or try more force is needed to brake and steer.
It illuminates when the ignition is switched
using the spare key. Do not remove key until vehicle has
on and goes out shortly after the engine
Emergency operation 3 35. starts. come to a standstill, otherwise the
If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that steering column lock could engage
Illuminates when the engine is running
the steering wheel lock is still locked: move unexpectedly.
steering wheel to and fro a little and press Caution
Contact a workshop for assistance.
Start/Stop button again.
Engine lubrication may be interrupted.
If 0 illuminates whilst driving a system This may result in damage to the engine
error has occurred that may eventually and/or locking of the drive wheels.
lead to a complete failure.
If 0 illuminates or flashes: The Start/Stop 1. Depress clutch.
button must be held depressed somewhat 2. Shift manual transmission or manual
longer to switch off the ignition. It is transmission automated 3 into neutral;
possible that the vehicle will not start for automatic transmission 3, set
during the next start attempt. selector lever to N.
If these flash continuously or if 0 lights, 3. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly
contact a workshop immediately. as possible without impeding other
vehicles.
4. Switch off ignition.
v
Airbag systems 3, belt tensioners 3,
deployable anti-roll bars 3
Control indicator illuminates red.
Fault in airbag system, belt tensioners or
extending anti-roll bars 3 86, 3 95, 3 101
v
Electronic Stability Programme
(ESPPlus) 3
Control indicator flashes or illuminates
yellow.
R If it flashes Flashing during driving
Brake system, clutch system On vehicles with manual transmission System takes action 3 198, 3 199, 3 225.
Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. automated 3, control indicator R flashes Illuminates while driving
Illuminated a few seconds after the ignition is switched System deactivated or fault in
It illuminates when the ignition is switched off if the hand brake has not been applied. system 3 199.
on if the hand brake is applied 3 210.
X
It illuminates upon release of the hand Seat belt 3
brake if the brake and clutch fluid level is Control indicator illuminates or flashes red.
too low 3 288.
Illuminated
9 Warning It illuminates when the ignition is switched
on until the seat belt is fastened.
Pull over. Stop your journey Flashing
immediately. Contact a workshop. After starting off, the control indicator
flashes if the safety belt is not fastened.
Fasten seat belt 3 87.
Q A j
Doors and luggage compartment open Engine electronics, transmission Manual transmission automated 3,
Control indicator illuminates red. electronics 3, immobiliser, Engine start
Comes on when a door or the luggage diesel fuel filter 3 Control indicator illuminates yellow.
compartment is opened. Control indicator illuminates or flashes The engine can only be started if the foot
yellow. brake is depressed. If the foot brake is not
p It illuminates for a few seconds when the depressed, control indicator 3 176
Alternator ignition is switched on. illuminates.
It illuminates when the ignition is switched IDS+
Fault in engine or transmission electronics.
on and goes out shortly after the engine Interactive Driving System 3, Continuous
Electronics have switched to emergency
starts. Damping Control (CDC) 3, SPORT mode 3
running programme, fuel consumption
Control indicator illuminates yellow.
Illuminates when the engine is running may be increased and the vehicles
Stop, switch off engine. Battery is not handling reduced 3 195. If the fault is not It illuminates for a few seconds when the
charging. Cooling may be faulty. For diesel eliminated by restarting the vehicle, ignition is switched on.
engines, the effect of the brake servo may contact a workshop immediately. Illuminates while driving
be lost. Contact a workshop immediately. Illuminated together with InSP4 in the Fault in system. Contact a workshop
service display: have the diesel fuel filter immediately.
W drained of water 3 3 287. IDS+ 3 198,
Coolant temperature
Flashes when the ignition is on CDC 3 200,
Fault in the electronic immobiliser system; SPORT mode 3 200.
Illuminates when the engine is running the engine cannot be started 3 29.
Stop. Switch off the engine.
Caution
Coolant temperature is too high.
Check the coolant level immediately 3 287.

If the coolant level is not the problem,
contact a workshop for assistance.
O
Turn signal lamps
Control indicator flashes green.
The control indicator flashes when a turn
signal or the hazard warning lamps are
activated.
Fast flashing: failure of a direction
indicator lamp or associated fuse, failure
of direction indicator lamp on trailer 3.
Change bulbs 3 253.
Fuses 3 246.
Picture no: 18624t.tif Picture no: Y

S r Fuel level
Engine oil level 3 Ultrasonic parking sensors 3 Control indicator illuminates or flashes
Control indicator illuminates yellow. Control indicator illuminates or flashes yellow.
The engine oil level is checked yellow. Illuminated
automatically. Illuminated Low fuel level in tank.
Illuminates when the engine is running Fault in system. Have the cause of the fault Flashing
Engine oil level too low. Check engine oil remedied by a workshop. Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately.
level and top up engine oil if necessary Flashing Never let the tank run dry!
3 285. Fault due to sensors that are dirty or
covered by ice or snow. Erratic fuel supply can cause catalytic
8 converter to overheat 3 194.
or
Exterior lights Diesel engines: Bleed fuel system after
Control indicator lights green. Interference due to external sources of driving until empty 3 226.
ultra sound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary
It illuminates when the exterior lights are
machines). Once the source of interference
switched on 3 138.
is removed, the system will operate
normally.
Ultrasonic parking sensors 3 204.
> T Z
Winter programme of automatic
Fog lamps 3 Exhaust emission 3
transmission 3 or manual transmission
Control indicator lights green. Control indicator illuminates or flashes
automated 3
It illuminates when the fog lamps are yellow.
Symbol lights in the gear display if the
switched on 3 140. Winter programme is engaged 3 174, It illuminates when the ignition is switched
3 180 3 185. on and goes out shortly after the engine
C starts.
Main beam 1 Illuminates when the engine is running
Control indicator lights blue. SPORT mode of automatic transmission 3 Fault in emission control system. The
It is illuminated when main beam is on and or manual transmission automated 3 permitted emissions may be exceeded.
during headlamp flash 3 7, 3 139. Symbol lights in the gear display if Sport Contact a workshop immediately.
mode is engaged 3 173, 3 180, 3 185.
r If it flashes when the engine is running:
Fog tail lamp y Fault which could lead to catalytic
Control indicator illuminates yellow. Seat occupancy recognition 3 converter damage. Ease up on the
Symbol lights or flashes in kilometre accelerator pedal until it stops flashing
It illuminates when the fog lamps are display. 3 195. Seek the assistance of a workshop
switched on 3 140. immediately.
Illuminated
Seat occupancy recognition has detected u
a child restraint system with transponders. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) 3
Airbag systems for the passenger are Control indicator illuminates red.
deactivated 3 96.
Illuminates while driving
If it flashes Fault in anti-lock braking system 3 211.
Fault in system or child seats with
transponder incorrectly fitted 3 96.
w
Deflation detection system 3,
tyre pressure monitoring system 3
Control indicator illuminates red or yellow.
Control indicator illuminates red
Tyre pressure loss. Stop immediately and
check tyre pressure 3 206.
Control indicator illuminates yellow
Fault in system. Contact a workshop
immediately 3 206, 3 207.
B
Picture no: 18624t.tif Picture no: Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL)
! Flashing Control indicator flashes yellow.
Preheating system 3, (on vehicles with diesel particle filter) Flashing
Diesel particle filter 3 If the filter needs to be cleaned and the Fault in system. Contact a workshop
Control indicator illuminates or flashes previous driving conditions did not allow immediately.
yellow. automatic cleaning to take place, control Flashes for 4 seconds when ignition
Illuminated indicator ! flashes. Continue driving if switched on
Preheating system on. Only activates when possible and do not allow the engine speed System converted for driving abroad.
outside temperatures are low. to drop below 2000 rpm.
AFL 3 142.
The control indicator ! goes off as soon as
the self-cleaning operation is complete. m
Diesel particle filter 3 196. Cruise control 3
Control indicator lights green.
It illuminates when the system is switched
on 3 202.
Picture no: 17021t.tif Picture no: Picture no: 17023t.tif

Instrument display Speedometer Fuel gauge
On some versions, the pointer of the Speed display. Display of fuel level in tank.
tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge Control indicator Y illuminates when the
briefly moves to its end position when the level is low. Refuel immediately if it begins
ignition is switched on. to flash.
Tachometer Never run the tank dry!
Display of engine speed in rpm.
Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,
Drive in a low engine speed range for each the amount of fuel required to fill the tank
gear as much as possible. may be less than the specified tank
capacity.
Caution
If the pointer is in the warning zone, the
maximum permissible engine speed has
been exceeded. Danger to the engine.
Time display 3
To set time, hold the setting button in
the instrument panel depressed for
approx. 2 seconds. A brief press will set
the flashing value. Hold the button
depressed for 2 seconds again to switch
to the next unit and to exit setting mode.
Bottom line:
Odometer
Records the kilometres counted.
Picture no: 17335t.tif. Picture no: 17008t.tif

Odometer display Service Display
Top line: InSP Service interval display. Shows
Trip odometer or clock display 3 distance remaining to next service.
To switch between the trip odometer and Further information 3 283.
the clock display 3, press reset knob InSP2 Faulty bulb 3 3 253,
briefly, see previous page.
InSP3 Battery voltage of remote control
Trip odometer or electronic key in Open&Start
Display of kilometres covered since reset. system low 3 3 32,3 37.
To reset, hold reset button down for InSP4 Drain water from diesel fuel
around one second with the ignition turned filter 3. Contact a workshop for
on, see previous page. assistance.
If the clock display is activated, first switch On vehicles with check control 3, an
to trip odometer. appropriate message is shown on the info
display instead of InSP2 and InSP3.
ESPoff Electronic Stability Program 3 P Part position on automatic

switched off 3 198. transmission.
ESPon Electronic Stability Program 3 R Reverse gear.
switched on 3 198. N Neutral.
A Automatic mode on manual
transmission automated.
M Manual mode on manual
transmission automated.
D Automatic mode on automatic
transmission.
1-4 Current gear on automatic
Picture no: 17022t.tif transmission.
Transmission display 3 1-5 Current gear of manual
Display of selected gear in automatic 1 - 6 3 transmission automated
transmission 3 or current gear or mode for if in manual mode.
manual transmission automated 3: For manual transmission automated 3, the
display flashes for a few seconds if A, M
or R is selected when the engine is running
but the foot brake is not depressed.
Board Computer 19,5 19:36
12:01 17 ,0C 11:25 } 21 .5C BC 1 All values
BC 2
Range 257.0
FM 3 90,6 MHz Timer 1
km
REG AS RDS TP
RDS [TP]
40 km/h
31.0
257km 8 7.0
Ltr.
L/100km

Information display Board information display 3 Graphical information display 3,
Triple information display Display of time, outside temperature and Colour information display 3
Display of time, outside temperature and date/infotainment system (when it is on). Display of time, outside temperature,
date/infotainment system (when it is on). date/infotainment system (when it is on)
and climate control system 3.
When the ignition is off, the time, date and
outside temperature can be presented for The graphical information display
15 seconds by briefly pressing one of the presents the information in monochrome.
two buttons below the display. The colour information display presents
the information in colour.
The type of information and how it is

displayed depends on the equipment of
the vehicle and the settings made.
Some information appears in the display in
an abbreviated form. :
8:56 -5 ,5C
Slippery road
07.05.2008 -2,5C
OK

Outside temperature In vehicles with graphical information
A fall in temperature is indicated display 3 or colour information display 3, a
immediately and a rise in temperature warning message appears the display as a
after a time delay. warning for icy road surfaces. There is no
message below -5 C.
If outside temperature drops to 3 C,
the symbol : illuminates in the triple 9 Warning
information display or the board
information display 3 as a warning for icy Caution: The road surface may already
road surfaces. : remains illuminated until be icy even though the display indicates
temperatures reach at least 5 C. a few degrees above 0 C.
Correcting time 3
The RDS signal of most VHF transmitters
automatically sets time. This can be
8:56 5 ,5C identified by } in the display.
Some transmitters do not send a correct 11:25 } 21 .5C
07.05.2008 time signal. In such cases, switch off
automatic time synchronisation.
Range
Access setting mode and go to setting of
year. Hold the button depressed for
approx. 3 seconds until } flashes in the
display and "RDS TIME" appears. Activate 257km
(RDS TIME 1) or deactivate (RDS TIME 0)
the function using the ; button. Exit setting
Picture no: 17024t.tif mode with the button. Picture no: 17337t.tif
Triple information display Board information display 3,
Set date and time Selecting functions
The infotainment system 3 must be off. To Functions and settings of some
access setting mode, press the button for equipment 3 can be accessed via the
approx. 2 seconds. The flashing value can board information display.
be set using the ; button. Use the button
This is done using the menus and buttons
to switch to the next unit and to exit setting
of the infotainment system 3.
mode.
Menus are exiting automatically after
approx. 5 seconds of inactivity.
11:25 } 21 .5C
System

Button selection on Infotainment system Select using the left adjuster wheel 3 Board information display 3,
The required function is called up in the on the steering wheel System settings
Settings menu using the OK button. The Pressing the adjuster wheel calls up Press the Settings button on the
settings are modified using the arrow the BC menu 3. The stop watch is operated infotainment system and menu item Audio
buttons. or measurement/calculation is restarted by will open.
The required function is called up in pressing in this menu 3.
Use the left arrow key to access System
the BC menu 3 using the arrow buttons. Rotating the adjuster wheel calls up the and select with the OK button.
The OK button is then used to operate the required function.
stop watch or restart measurement/
calculation.
11:25 } 21 .5C 11:25 } 21 .5C 11:25 } 21 .5C

Clock Sync.On [11]:25 Deutsch

Automatic time synchronisation 3 Setting date and time Language selection
The RDS signal of most VHF transmitters The value to be entered is highlighted by You can select the display language for
automatically sets time. This can be the arrows. Make the required setting using some functions.
identified by } in the display. the arrow keys. Select the required language using the
Some transmitters do not send a correct Ignition logic 3 arrow keys.
time signal. In such cases, switch off See Infotainment system instructions.
Deactivate (Clock Sync.Off) or activate
(Clock Sync.On) automatic time
synchronisation using the arrow keys.
Board information display 3,

trip computer 3
Access trip computer vehicle data by
pressing the BC button on the infotainment
11:25 } 21 .5C system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the 11:25 } 21 .5C
steering wheel.
Unit Europe-SI Some information appears in the display in Inst. Consumpt.
an abbreviated form.
Once an audio function has been selected,
the subsequent rows of the trip computer 7.6 l/100km
function are displayed.

Setting units of measure Instantaneous consumption
Select the required unit of measure using Display of instantaneous consumption. If
the arrow keys. vehicle speed is too low, consumption per
hour is displayed.
Average consumption Resetting the trip computer

Display of average consumption. The The measurement or calculation of the
measurement can be reset at any time. following trip computer data can be reset:
Effective consumption z Average consumption.
Display of fuel quantity consumed. The 11:25 } 21 .5C z Effective consumption.
measurement can be reset at any time.
z Average speed.
Average speed Range z Distance travelled.
Display of average speed. The
measurement can be reset at any time. Select the required trip computer data.
Reset by pressing the OK button or the left
Stoppages in the journey with the ignition
off are not included in the calculations.
257km adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
Distance travelled
Display of distance travelled. The Picture no: 17337t.tif
measurement can be reset at any time. Range
Range is calculated from current fuel tank
content and instantaneous consumption.
The display shows average values.
After refuelling, the vehicle updates the
range automatically after a brief delay.
If less than 50 km can be driven with the
fuel remaining in the tank, the warning
Range appears in the display.
If less than 30 km can be driven with the
fuel remaining in the tank, the warning
Refuel! 3 appears in the display.
11:25 } 21 .5C FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3
Stop Watch 90.6 MHz
01:22:32 h 19,5 19:36

Stop watch Graphical information display 3 Selection using buttons 3 on the
Select function, then press the OK button or or colour information display 3, Infotainment system
the left adjuster wheel on the steering selecting functions Select menu items using menus and the
wheel to start or stop the stop watch. buttons on the Infotainment system. Select
Functions and settings of the infotainment
marked item using the OK button and
system 3 and climate control system 3 can
confirm command.
be accessed via the display.
To exit a menu, press the right or left arrow
This is done via the menus and buttons, the
key to access Return or Main.
multifunction button 3 on the infotainment
system or with the left adjuster wheel 3 on
the steering wheel.
FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3
90.6 MHz
19,5 19:36

To select using the multifunction button Select using left adjuster wheel 3 Function ranges
To highlight menu options or commands or on steering wheel For each functional area there is a main
select function ranges, rotate the Select menu item by rotating. page (Main), which is selected at the
multifunction button. To select the marked item or confirm top edge of the display (not with the
To select the marked item or confirm commands, press adjuster wheel. Infotainment system CD 30 or the
commands, press multifunction button. Mobile Phone Portal):
To exit a menu, rotate the multifunction z Audio,

button to Return or Main and select. z Navigation 3,
z Telephone 3,
z Trip computer 3.
Correcting time 3
The RDS signal of most VHF transmitters
sets time automatically.
7 Settings 19,5 19:36 7 Time, Date 19,5 19:36
Some transmitters do not send a correct
Time, Date 19:36 Time 19:36 time signal. In such cases, switch off
Language
Units 25 . 05 . 2008
On infotainment systems with
Date 25 . 05 . 2008
navigation 3, time and date are also
Contrast adjusted upon receipt of a GPS satellite
Day / Night 6 Synchron. clock automatical. signal.
6 Ign. logic The function is activated via the Time,
Date menu by ticking the box in front of
Picture no: 17332t.tif Picture no: 17340t.tif Synchron. clock automatical.
System settings Setting the date and time 3
Press the Main button 3 on the Select menu item Time, Date from the
infotainment system. Settings menu.
Press the Settings button of the Select the required menu item and make
infotainment system. On Infotainment the setting.
System CD 30, make sure no menu has
been selected.
7 Settings 19,5 19:36 7 13 Languages 19,5 19:36 7 Settings 19,5 19:36
Time, Date X Deutsch Time, Date

Language Deutsch English Language ~ Europe-SI
Units English Espaol Units | Japan
Contrast Espaol Nederlands Contrast | Great Britain
Day / Night .... Franais Day / Night | USA
6 Ign. logic Italiano 6 Ign. logic

Language selection Select the desired language. Setting units of measure
You can select the display language for Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of Select menu item Units from the
some functions. the menu item. Settings menu.
Select menu item Language from the In systems with voice output 3, when the Select the desired unit.
Settings menu. language setting of the display is changed Selections are indicated by a o in front of
the system will ask whether the the menu item.
announcement language should also be
changed see Infotainment system
instructions.
Setting display mode 3

Display brightness can be adjusted when
the vehicle lights are on. Settings can also
7 Contrast 19,5 19:36 be made as follows:
Select menu item Day / Night from the
Settings menu. Range 257 km
12 Automatic: adapted based on vehicle
lighting. Aver. Consump. 7.0 L/100km
Always day design: black or coloured text Inst. consumpt. 7.6 L/100km
on light background.
Always night design: white or coloured 19,5 23 5 Eco x 19:36
text on dark background.

Picture no: 17926t.tif Selections are indicated by a o in front of Picture no: 17329t.tif
Adjusting contrast 3
the menu item. Graphical information display 3
(graphical information display) or Colour information display 3,
Select menu item Contrast from the Ignition logic 3 Trip computer 3
Settings menu. See Infotainment system instructions.
The trip computer main menu (Main)
Confirm the required setting. provides information about range,
average consumption 3 and
instantaneous consumption of BC 1.
To display other trip computer data, press
the BC button on the infotainment
system 3, select the Board Computer
menu from the display or press the left
adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer
menu.
Distance travelled
Display of distance travelled. The
measurement can be reset at any time.
Average speed
Display of average speed. The
Range 257 km measurement can be reset at any time.
Range Stoppages in the journey with the ignition
Aver. Consump. 7.0 L/100km 33km off are not included in the calculations.
Inst. consumpt. 7.6 L/100km Effective consumption
Display of fuel quantity consumed. The
19,5 23 5 Eco x 19:36 OK measurement can be reset at any time.
Average consumption
Picture no: 17329t.tif Picture no: 17345t.tif Display of average consumption. The
Range If less than 50 km can be driven with the measurement can be reset at any time.
Range is calculated from current fuel tank fuel remaining in the tank, the warning
content and instantaneous consumption. Range appears in the display.
The display shows average values. If less than 30 km can be driven with the
After refuelling, the vehicle updates the fuel remaining in the tank, the warning
range automatically after a brief delay. Please refuel! 3 appears in the display.
Instantaneous consumption
Display of instantaneous consumption. If
vehicle speed is too low, consumption per
hour is displayed.
Board Computer 19,5 19:36 Reset BC 1 19,5 19:36 Reset BC 1 19,5 19:36
BC 1 All values All values All values
BC 2
257.0 257.0 km 257.0
1
km km
Timer
40 km/h 40 km/h 40 km/h
Tyres
31.0 31.0 Ltr. 31.0
8
Ltr. Ltr.
7.0 L/100km 7.0 L/100km 7.0 L/100km

Resetting the trip computer The information of the two trip computers To reset all information of a trip computer,
The measurement or calculation of the can be reset separately, making it possible select menu item All values.
following trip computer data can be reset: to evaluate data from different time
z Distance. periods.
z Average speed. Select the required trip computer data and

confirm.
z Effective consumption.
z Average consumption.
Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer
menu.
The desired stop watch display can be

selected from the Options menu 3:
Driving Time excl. Stops
Board Computer 19,5 19:36 Board Computer
The time the vehicle is in motion is
BC 1 recorded. Stationary time is not included. BC 1
BC 2 00:00:00 Driving Time incl. Stops BC 2
Timer The time the vehicle is in motion is Timer

recorded. The time the vehicle is stationary
Tyres Start Tyres
with the key in the ignition switch is
Reset included.
Options Travel Time
Measurement of the time from manual
Picture no: 17348t.tif activation via Start to manual deactivation Picture no: 17334t.tif
via Reset.
Stop watch Display of current tyre pressure 3
Select menu item Timer from the Select menu item Tyres from the
Board Computer menu. Board Computer menu.
To start, select menu item Start. To stop, The current pressure of each tyre is
select menu item Stop. displayed.
To reset, select menu item Reset. Additional information 3 207.
Check control 3 Examples of warning messages for the

Check control monitors some fluid levels, graphical information display 3 and colour
the tyre pressure 3, battery of the remote information display 3 are depicted. On the
control, the antitheft warning system 3, the board information display, messages
brake light switch and important exterior appear in an abbreviated form.
lights, including cable and fuses. In trailer Confirm warnings 3 120, 3 125.
mode, the trailer lighting is monitored. Unconfirmed warnings can be redisplayed Brakelight
Warning messages appear on the display. after a certain time. check right
If there are several warning messages, they Warning messages:
are displayed one after the other.
Remote Control
Some of the warning messages appear on Battery OK
the display in an abbreviated form. check
Battery voltage of remote control or Picture no: 18613t.tif
electronic key in Open&Start system If there is a fault in the vehicle lighting, the
too low 3, 3 32. respective fault source is displayed as text,
e.g.:
Brakelight switch
check Brakelight
check right
Brake light does not come on during
braking. Have the cause of the fault
eliminated immediately by a workshop.
Safeguard
check
System fault in anti-theft alarm system.
Have the cause of the fault eliminated
immediately by a workshop.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring In vehicles with tyre pressure control
system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the system 3, if there is major loss of pressure
display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.: in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at
Tyre pressure fault, e.g.:
check rear Attention!
right Rear left tyre
(value in bar) pressure loss Coolant level
Check tyre pressure using a calibrated (value in bar) check
tester as soon as possible. Tyre pressure Stop immediately, check tyre and tyre
monitoring system 3 3 207. Check tyre pressure. Tyre pressure monitoring
pressure 3 319. system 3 3 207. OK
Washer
Fluid Level Picture no: 17339t.tif
check Coolant level
Windscreen washer system fluid level too check
low. Top up washer fluid 3 290. Engine cooling system fluid level too low.
Rear window washer system and Check fluid level immediately 3 287.
headlamp washer system 3 are Interruption of power supply
deactivated if washer fluid level is low. Stored warning messages appear on the
display one after the other.
Warning buzzers Indicator and warning buzzers for z Continuous warning buzzer during roof
When starting the engine or whilst Astra TwinTop 3: operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have
driving: z Indicator buzzer upon completed been triggered.
z If the electronic key of the Open&Start opening or closing of the convertible z Continuous warning buzzer starting one
system 3 is not present or is not hardtop. minute before the end of the 9-minute
recognised. z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising standby time with the roof in an
z If seat belt 3 is not fastened. or lowering of the electric luggage intermediate position.
compartment loading aid. z Continuous warning buzzer starting one
z If a door or the tailgate is ajar when the
vehicle starts off. z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed minute before the end of the 9-minute
during roof operation. standby time with the loading aid in a
z Once you have reached a certain raised position.
speed 3 if the hand brake is applied. z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully
opening during operation of the luggage z Persistent warning buzzer when closing
z When a factory-programmed speed is compartment loading aid. the luggage compartment lid, if the
exceeded 3. lowering process of the electric load aid
z Gong tone during roof operation if
z With manual transmission automated 3, vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h. is not complete or has been interrupted.
if the drivers door is opened when the
engine is running, a gear is engaged and z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds
the foot brake is not depressed. 30 km/h if the roof is not fully open or
closed.
When the vehicle is parked and the
drivers door is opened: z Three gong tones during roof or loading
z When the key is in the ignition switch 3. aid operation if the luggage
compartment blind is not attached.
z When the following are switched on:
Parking lamps or dipped beam. z Three gong tones during roof operation
if outside temperature is below -20 C,
z With Open&Start system 3 and vehicle battery voltage is too low or the
automatic transmission if the selector system is overloaded.
lever is not in P.
z With manual transmission automated 3,
if the hand brake is not applied and no
gear is engaged when the engine is off.

Windscreen wipers Adjustable timed interval wipe 3 Automatic wiping with rain sensor 3
Windscreen wiper for windscreen Adjust wiper interval to a value between $ = Automatic wiping with rain sensor
The stalk always returns to its home 2 and 15 seconds: switch ignition on, move
stalk downwards from position , wait The rain sensor detects the amount of
position. water on the screen and automatically
for required interval time and move stalk
& = Fast to $. controls the wipers.
% = Slow
After turning on the ignition and setting the
$ = Adjustable timed interval wiping stalk to $, the interval is set to 6 seconds.
= Off
For a single swipe with the windscreen
wipers off, press the stalk down.
The system runs through the wiper stages
when the stalk is pushed past the
resistance point and held. A signal tone
sounds at .
Do not activate if the windscreen is icy.
Deactivate in car washes.

Keep the sensor field of the rain sensor free Empty windscreen washer system and Rear screen wiper and washer system
of dust, dirt and ice. headlamp washer system 3 To switch on, push stalk forwards. The rear
Pull stalk toward steering wheel. Washer window wiper swipes in timed interval
fluid sprays onto the windscreen and the mode. Switch off by pushing stalk forwards
wipers swipe for a few strokes. At low again.
speeds, there is a single post-wash swipe. If the stalk is held forwards, washer fluid is
If the lights are on, washer fluid is also sprayed on the rear window.
sprayed on the headlamps. The headlamp The rear screen wiper comes on
washer system 3 is then deactivated for automatically 3 when the windscreen
2 minutes. wiper is switched on and reverse gear is
engaged.
138 Lighting
Lighting Version with daytime running lights 3

With the ignition on and the light switch set
to 7 or AUTO the parking lamps are
switched on. If the engine is running the
dipped beam switches itself on.
The daytime running lights switch off when
Exterior lights ....................................... 138
the ignition is switched off.
Main beam, headlamp flash .............. 139
Automatic dipped beam activation 3 139 Follow the regulations of the country in
Turn signal lamps ................................ 139 which you are driving when using daytime
running lights and fog lamps 3.
Fog lamps > 3.................................... 140
Fog tail lamp r ................................... 140 Driving abroad 3 146.
Reversing lamps................................... 140
Hazard warning lamps ....................... 141 Picture no: 17122t.tif
Headlamp range adjustment ?......... 141 Exterior lights
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) .. 142 Turn light switch:
Ambient lighting 3 .............................. 143 7 = Off
Parking lamps 3 .................................. 143 8 = Parking lamps
Instrument illumination,
9 = Dipped beam or main beam
Information display illumination...... 144
Courtesy lamp...................................... 144 In positions 8 and 9, the tail lamps
Puddle light 3 ...................................... 145 and number plate lamps are also on.
Battery discharge protection.............. 146 Control indicator 8 3 112.
Misted light covers............................... 146
If the ignition is switched off with the
Headlamps when driving abroad ...... 146
dipped beam or main beam on, the
parking lamps illuminate.
Lighting 139

Main beam, headlamp flash Automatic dipped beam Turn signal lamps
To switch from dipped beam to main activation 3 To activate, press stalk up or down lightly.
beam, press stalk forwards. Light switch set to AUTO: When the engine Stalk up = Right turn signal lamps
To switch back to dipped beam, press stalk is running, dipped beam is activated if
Stalk down = Left turn signal lamps
forwards again or pull towards steering exterior light conditions call for such.
wheel. For reasons of safety, the light switch should
To activate the headlamp flash, pull stalk always remain in the AUTO position.
towards steering wheel. Main beam is Move light switch to 9 if visibility is poor
engaged for the duration of activation. because of fog, for example.
140 Lighting
After operation, the turn signal stalk Fog tail lamp r

returns to its starting position. The fog tail lamp can only be switched on
If the stalk is moved past the resistance both the ignition and dipped beam/
point, the turn signal lamp remains on. parking lamps are on.
When the steering wheel moves back Operate with the r button.
toward the straight-ahead position, the
turn signal lamp is automatically The vehicle fog tail lamps are deactivated
deactivated. when towing.
For three turn signal flashes, such as when Reversing lamps
changing lanes, push the stalk to the
The reversing lamps come on when reverse
resistance point and release.
gear is engaged and the ignition is on.
Move the stalk to the resistance point and
hold for the turn signals to flash longer. Picture no: 17124t.tif
Switch the turn signal off manually by Fog lamps > 3
moving the stalk slightly. The fog lamps can only be switched on
when both the ignition and lights are on.
Operate with the > button.
Lighting 141
Vehicles without automatic level control

system
0 = Front seats occupied
1 = All seats occupied
2 = All seats occupied and
luggage compartment load
3 = Drivers seat occupied and
luggage compartment load
Vehicles with automatic level control

system
0 = Front seats occupied
Picture no: 16991t.tif Picture no: 17125t.tif 1 = All seats occupied
Hazard warning lamps Headlamp range adjustment ? 1 = All seats occupied and
Operate with button. Manual headlamp range adjustment 3 luggage compartment load
To aid location of the pushbutton, the red Adapt headlamp range to the vehicle load 2 = Drivers seat occupied and
surface is illuminated when the ignition to prevent dazzling of other drivers: Press luggage compartment load
switched on. When the button is pressed, the button to disengage and rotate to the
required position. Automatic headlamp range
its control indicator flashes in time with the
adjustment 3
hazard warning lamps. Automatic level control 3 3 205.
On vehicles with Xenon headlamps,
The hazard warning lamps activate the range of the headlamps is adjusted
automatically if the airbags are deployed. automatically based on vehicle load.
142 Lighting
Picture no: 17126t.tif Picture no: Picture no: 17127t.tif

Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 Curve lighting Control indicator B for adaptive driving
(AFL) The Xenon light beam pivots based lights
improves lighting in curves (curve lighting) on steering wheel position and speed Flashing: Fault in system. System not ready
on vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamp (from approx. 10 km/h). for operation.
system. The headlamps shine at an angle of up If the cornering light swivelling device fails,
to 15 to the right or left of the direction the relevant dipped beam is switched off.
of travel. The corresponding fog lamp is
Motorway lighting automatically switched on for reasons
At higher speeds and continuous straight of safety.
ahead travel, the dipped beam Contact a workshop for assistance.
automatically raises slightly, thereby
increasing headlamp range. The control indicator B flashes for
4 seconds after the ignition is switched
on as a reminder that the headlamps
have been adjusted, see "Headlamps
when driving abroad" 3 146.
Lighting 143
If the drivers door is left open, the lamps

will go out after two minutes.
The light is switched off immediately by
inserting the key into the ignition or pulling
the turn signal stalk again with the drivers
door open.

Ambient lighting 3 Parking lamps 3
Dipped beam and reversing lamps 3 light The front parking lamp and tail lamp of
for around 30 seconds after the driver exits one side of the vehicle can be activated
the vehicle and closes his door. when parking:
To activate 1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3.
1. Switch off ignition. 2. Ignition off.
2. Remove ignition key 3. 3. Move turn signal stalk all the way
3. Open drivers door. up (right parking lamp) or down
4. Pull turn signal stalk toward steering (left parking lamp).
wheel. Confirmed through a signal tone and the
5. Close drivers door. corresponding turn signal control indicator.
To switch it off, switch on the ignition or
move the turn signal stalk in the opposite
direction.
144 Lighting

Instrument illumination, Courtesy lamp Front reading lamps 3
Information display illumination Automatic interior light Operated with the a buttons when ignition
Comes on when ignition is switched on. Comes on automatically when the vehicle is is on.
unlocked with the remote control, when a
Brightness can be adjusted when the
door is opened or when the key is removed
exterior lights are on: Push to release
from the ignition switch after the ignition is
knob k and then turn it clockwise or
switched off.
anticlockwise and hold until the desired
brightness is obtained. Goes off automatically after a delay when
the doors are closed or immediately when
Display mode 3 3 129.
the ignition is switched on or the doors are
locked.
Front courtesy lamp
Operated with the c button when the
doors are closed.
Lighting 145
Entry lighting 3 Luggage compartment lighting

After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument Luggage compartment lighting comes on
and switch lighting come on for a few when the luggage compartment is opened.
seconds. Automatically regulated centre console
Door handle lighting 3 lighting 3
When the exterior lamps are on, the interior Spotlight in housing of interior mirror.
front door handles are illuminated. Daylight-dependent, automatically
Illuminated mirror in the sun visors 3 regulated centre console lighting with
The lighting switches on when the cover is ignition switched on.
opened.
Glove compartment lighting Puddle light 3
The glove compartment lighting comes on After unlocking the vehicle, the number
when the lid is opened. plate lamps come on for a few seconds.
Courtesy lamps and rear reading lamps 3 Cigarette lighter and ashtray
Operated with switch (I = on, 0 = off, centre illumination 3
position = automatic courtesy lamps). Cigarette lighter and ashtray illumination
light up when the ignition is switched on.
146 Lighting
Battery discharge protection Headlamps when driving abroad Vehicles with adaptive forward lighting 3
To prevent the battery from becoming The asymmetrical dipped beam increases (AFL)
discharged, the courtesy lamp, reading the field of vision on the passenger side of 1. Pull and hold stalk for main beam on
lamps, luggage compartment lighting and the lane. steering wheel (headlamp flash)
glove compartment lighting switch off This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the 2. Switch on ignition.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition vehicle is driven in countries where traffic 3. After approx. 3 seconds, an acoustic
is switched off. drives on the opposite side of the road. signal sounds and then AFL control
indicator B flashes approx. 4 seconds.
Misted light covers Do as follows to prevent glare:
The inside of the light covers may mist up Vehicles with halogen headlamp system After the switch, AFL control indicator B
briefly in poor, wet and cold weather or Xenon headlamp system 3 flashes for 4 seconds each time the ignition
conditions, in heavy rain or after washing. Have headlamps adjusted in a workshop. is switched on.
The mist disappears quickly by itself; to To return to asymmetrical dipped beam,
help, switch on the lights. pull and hold the main beam stalk again,
switch on the ignition and wait for the
acoustic signal. AFL control indicator B
will then discontinue flashing.
Control indicator B 3 114, 3 142.
Infotainment system 147
Infotainment system Radio reception 3

Hissing, noise, distortion or loss of radio
reception may be caused by
z changes in distance from the
transmitter,
z multi-path reception due to reflection
and
z shadowing.
The infotainment system is operated as
described in the operating instructions.
Remote control on steering
Radio reception 3................................ 147 wheel 3
Infotainment system 3........................ 147 The functions of the Infotainment system 3
Remote control on steering wheel 3 .. 147 and the information display can be
Rear seat audio system 3................... 148 operated using the adjuster wheels and
AUX input 3......................................... 148 buttons on the steering wheel.
Mobile telephones and radio Further information 3 121, 3 126 and in the
equipment 3...................................... 148 infotainment system operating instructions.
148 Infotainment system
Mobile telephones and radio

equipment 3
The Opel installation instructions and the
operating guidelines provided by the
telephone manufacturer must be observed
when fitting and operating a mobile
phone. Failure to do so could invalidate
the vehicles operating permit
(EU Directive 95/54/EC).
Recommended prerequisites for fault-free
operation:
z Professionally installed exterior antenna
to obtain the maximum range possible.
z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt.
Rear seat audio system 3 AUX input 3
Twin Audio enables occupants to choose The AUX input is in the centre console next z Installation of the telephone in a suitable
between the audio source played on the to the hand brake. spot, pay attention to relevant
infotainment system or a separate audio information 3 103.
An external audio source such as portable
source. Only an audio source that is not CD player can be connected using a
currently active on the infotainment system 3.5 mm jack plug via the AUX input.
can be controlled using Twin Audio.
Keep AUX input clean and dry at all times.
Two headphone connections are available,
with separate volume controls. Further information is available in the
infotainment system operating
Further information is available in the instructions.
infotainment system operating instructions.
Obtain advice on predetermined For reasons of safety, we recommend that

installation locations for the external you do not use the phone while driving. Caution
antenna and equipment holder and ways Even use of a handsfree set can be a
Mobile phones and radio equipment
of using devices with transmission power of distraction while driving. Be sure to observe
may cause malfunctions in the vehicle
more than 10 watts. any country-specific regulations.
electronics if they are operated in the
We recommend that you consult your Opel vehicle without the external antenna
Service Partner, who will have brackets and 9 Warning
unless the above-mentioned regulations
various installation kits available as Mobile phones that do not comply with are complied with.
accessories and will install them in the above-mentioned mobile phone
accordance with regulations. standard and radio equipment must
Use of a handsfree attachment without only be operated using an antenna that
external antenna with mobile telephone is attached to the exterior of the vehicle.
standards GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS is
only permitted if the maximum transmission
power of the mobile telephone is 2 watts for
GSM 900 or 1 watt for the other types.
150 Climate control
Climate control
Heating and ventilation system,

air conditioning system 3................. 150
Automatic air conditioning system 3 151
Electronic climate control system 3 ... 151
Air vents ............................................... 152
Heating and ventilation system ......... 153
Air conditioning system 3................... 156
Automatic air conditioning system 3 158 Picture no: 17930t.tif Picture no: 17142t.tif
Electronic climate control system 3 ... 163 Heating and ventilation system, The buttons for cooling n and air
Heater................................................... 169 air conditioning system 3 recirculation 4 are only found on
Air intake .............................................. 169 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are versions with optional air conditioning
Cabin air filter ...................................... 169 combined into one unit that is designed to system 3.
Regular operation ............................... 169 provide comfort regardless of the season, Air conditioning system 3 3 156, 3 158.
Service .................................................. 169 weather or outside temperature.
When cooling 3 is activated, the air is
cooled and dried.
The heating unit heats the air as required in
all operating modes depending on the
position of the temperature switch. The air
supply can be adjusted to suit requirements
by means of the fan.
Climate control 151
The set values appear on the information

display.
Electronic climate control system 3 163.

Automatic air conditioning Electronic climate control
system 3 system 3
Provides a comfortable interior regardless Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle
of the weather, outside temperature or interior regardless of the conditions outside.
season. To ensure a uniform and comfortable
When an interior temperature is set with climate in the vehicle, the temperature
the temperature control, the temperature of inflowing air, air-flow rate and air
and amount of inflowing air are distribution are automatically adapted
automatically regulated. A uniform, based on the climate conditions outside
comfortable climate in the vehicle is the vehicle and the current temperature
thereby automatically obtained based on of the vehicle interior.
outside climate conditions.
Automatic air conditioning system 3 158.
152 Climate control
Windscreen defroster nozzles (2)

Air distribution switch to l or J: Air flows
onto windscreen and side windows.
Additional vents
below the windscreen and door windows
and in the front footwell.

Air vents Centre and side air vents (1)
At least one air vent must be open while Open nozzle: move vertical knurled wheel
cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is downwards.
on in order to prevent the evaporator from Aim the flow of air by turning the horizontal
icing up due to lack of air movement. adjuster wheel.
The interior ventilation can be adjusted to To close the vent, turn the vertical adjuster
a comfortable level by adjusting the wheel fully up. The symbol 0 appears. The
temperature switch. slats of the vent remain open although the
To increase the air supply, turn the fan all air supply is closed.
the way up and set the air distribution
switch to M or L.
Climate control 153

Heating and ventilation system Temperature Air flow
Air distribution Adjust with centre rotary switch. Adjust with right rotary switch.
Adjust with left rotary switch. Red area = Warm x Switched off
L To head area via adjustable vents, to Blue area = Cold 1-4 Selected fan speed
footwell The amount of heat is dependent on the The rate of air flow is determined by
M To head area via adjustable vents coolant temperature and is thus not fully the fan. The fan should therefore also
l To windscreen and front door attained until the engine is warm. be switched on during a journey.
windows
J To windscreen, front door windows
and footwell
K To footwell
Intermediate settings are possible.
Open the air vents when the switch is set
to L or M.
154 Climate control
Heating The comfort and general well-being of the

For rapid warming of the passenger vehicle occupants are to a large extent
compartment: dependent on a suitable ventilation and
z Set air distribution switch to desired heating setting.
position, preferably position J 3 153. To achieve a stratification of temperature
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as with the pleasant effect of "cool head and
far as it will go (warm). warm feet", turn the rotary switch for air
z Set the fan to speed 3. distribution to K or J, set temperature
rotary switch to any position (in the mid-
range with stratification of temperature).

Ventilation
z For maximum ventilation in head area:
set air distribution switch to M and open
all vents.
z For ventilation to foot well: Set air
distribution switch to K.
z For simultaneous ventilation to the head
area and the foot well: set air distribution
switch to L.
z Set the temperature to the desired
setting.
z Switch fan on, adjust as required.
Climate control 155
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as

far as it will go (warm).
z Set fan switch to 3 or 4.
z Activate heated rear window .
z Open side air vents as required and
direct them towards the side windows.

Heating the foot well Window demisting and de-icing
z Set air distribution switch to K.
z Move temperature switch to red zone. 9 Warning
z Switch on fan. Failure to follow the instructions could

lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp

weather, damp clothing or low outside
temperatures:
z Move air distribution switch to l.
z For simultaneous footwell heating,
set air distribution switch to J.
156 Climate control
Air conditioning system 3

As a supplement to the heating and
ventilation system, the air conditioning
system cools and dehumidifies (dries)
inflowing air.
If cooling or dehumidification is not
desired, switch off cooling in order to
save fuel.
Cooling switches off automatically at low
outside temperatures.

Cooling n Air recirculation system 4
Only operate with the engine and fan The air recirculation system is activated or
running. Activate or deactivate with deactivated by pressing the 4 button.
the n button. If fumes or unpleasant odours penetrate
When cooling (AC compressor) is active, from outside: temporarily switch on air
air is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling recirculation system 4.
or dehumidification is not desired, switch To increase the cooling power at high
off cooling in order to save fuel. outside temperatures, temporarily switch
Cooling switches off automatically at low on the air recirculation system.
outside temperatures.
When cooling is on condensation forms,
which is expelled from the underside of
the vehicle.
Climate control 157
9 Warning
The air recirculation system minimises

the entry of outside air. The humidity
increases, and the windows can mist up.
The quality of the passenger
compartment air deteriorates which
may cause the vehicle occupants to feel
drowsy.
Air distribution to l: the air recirculation

system is automatically switched off to
speed up window demisting and prevent
fogging. Picture no: 17156t.tif Picture no: 17157t.tif
Comfort setting Maximum cooling
z Set cooling n as desired. Open windows and sun roof 3 briefly so
z Air recirculation system 4 off. that warm air can escape rapidly.
z Set air distribution switch to M or L. z Cooling n on.
z Set temperature switch as desired. z Air recirculation system 4 on.
z Switch on fan at desired speed. z Set air distribution switch to M.
z Open or adjust air vents as required. z Turn the temperature switch

anticlockwise as far as it will go (cold).
Temperature switch in centre of
adjustment range: warmer air will flow into z Set fan switch to 4.
the foot well and cooler air into the upper z Open all air vents.
zone, with warmer air coming from the side
air vents and cooler air from the centre
vents.
158 Climate control
z Cooling n on, the AC compressor Automatic air conditioning

switches off automatically at low exterior system 3
temperatures (icing). Provides a uniformly comfortable interior
z Move air distribution switch to l. regardless of the weather, outside
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise. temperature or season.
z Set fan switch to 4. To ensure a constant and comfortable

climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
z Open side air vents as required and the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are
direct them towards door windows. changed automatically based on climate
z Switch on heated rear window . conditions outside the vehicle.
Temperature changes due to external
influences, such as direct sunlight, are
Picture no: 17158t.tif automatically compensated.
Window demisting and de-icing
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could

visibility.

temperatures:
Climate control 159

Automatic mode Air distribution Temperature preset
Basic setting for maximum comfort: Adjust with left rotary switch. Adjust with centre rotary switch.
z Set fan switch to A. L To head area via adjustable vents, Set the rotary switch to the required value.
to footwell Intermediate settings are possible.
z Set the air distribution switch to the M To head area via adjustable vents
required setting. The selected temperature is maintained.
l To windscreen and front door
z Use rotary switch to set temperature windows For reasons of comfort, temperature can
to 22 C (a higher or lower temperature J To windscreen and front door only be changed in small increments.
can be set as desired). windows, to footwell At the end positions, there is no
z Switch on A/C compressor 3 160. K To footwell temperature regulation. The air
z Open all air vents. Intermediate settings are possible. conditioning system works with maximum
cooling or heating.
Deactivation of the air conditioning Open the air vents when the switch is
compressor can reduce the level of set to L or M. The amount of heat is dependent on the
comfort and safety 3 160. coolant temperature and is thus not fully
attained until the engine is warm.
160 Climate control

Air flow To activate/deactivate air conditioning Manual air recirculation mode
Adjust with right rotary switch. compressor (cooling) n The air recirculation system prevents
1 - 4 Manual fan speed setting. Only operate with the engine and fan the entry of outside air and the air in the
Intermediate settings are possible. running. Activate or deactivate with passenger compartment is circulated.
A Automatic fan speed setting. the n button. The air recirculation system is activated
x Fan switched off. When cooling (AC compressor) is active, or deactivated with the 4 button.
Fan speed is regulated to provide the rate air is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling
of air flow necessary to maintain the pre- or dehumidification is not desired, switch 9 Warning
selected temperature. off cooling in order to save fuel.
The air recirculation system minimises
Select automatic mode for the highest level Cooling switches off automatically at low the entry of outside air. If operated
of comfort. outside temperatures. without cooling, humidity increases
When the fan is off, the air conditioning When cooling is on condensation forms, and the windows can mist up. The
compressor is also off. which is expelled from the underside of quality of the passenger compartment
the vehicle. air deteriorates which may cause the
vehicle occupants to feel drowsy.
Climate control 161
Heating The comfort and general well-being of the

For rapid warming of the passenger vehicle occupants are to a large extent
compartment: dependent on a suitable ventilation and
z Move air distribution switch to required heating setting.
position 3 153. To obtain a stratification of temperature in
z Set the centre rotary switch to the the vehicle with the pleasant effect "cool
desired temperature. We recommend a head and warm feet", set the air
value of about 22 C. distribution switch to K or J, set the
z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be temperature switch to about 22 C and
manually set: Set the rotary switch to open the centre air vents.
position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are
also possible.

Ventilation
z For maximum ventilation in head area:
set air distribution switch to M and open
all vents.
z For ventilation to foot well: Set air
distribution switch to K.
z For simultaneous ventilation to the head
area and the foot well: set air distribution
switch to L.
z Set desired temperature.
z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be
manually set: Set the rotary switch to
position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are
also possible.
162 Climate control
z Set temperature to maximum heating,

i.e. turn the centre rotary switch all the
way to the right (28 C).
z Switch on heated rear window .
Operation with cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is not possible when outside
temperatures are low.
To switch off, press button V again; the
automatic air conditioning system will
operate at the settings selected previously.

Maximum cooling Window demisting and de-icing
Open windows and sun roof 3 briefly so
that warm air can escape rapidly. 9 Warning
z Cooling n on. Failure to follow the instructions could
z Set air distribution switch to M. lead to misted or icy windows and
z Set the temperature switch to the desired
visibility.
temperature.
z Set fan switch to A. Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp
z Open all air vents. temperatures:
The automatic climate control system z Cooling n on, the AC compressor
provides maximum cooling down to the set switches off automatically at low outside
value. temperatures (icing).
At settings below 17 C (rotary switch all z Press button V: In switch position A, the
the way to the left), the system continually fan automatically switches to the highest
runs with maximum cooling. When the air speed and air is directed to the
conditioning compressor is running, air windscreen.
recirculation is switched on automatically.
Climate control 163
Electronic climate control

system 3
Provides a the greatest amount of comfort
in the interior regardless of the weather, FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3
outside temperature or season.
To ensure a constant and comfortable
climate in the vehicle, the temperature of 90.6 MHz
the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the
air distribution are changed automatically
according to climatic conditions outside
the vehicle.
The climate is regulated automatically
based on personal settings. Picture no: 17143t.tif Picture no: 18483s.tif
Temperature changes due to external Different settings are stored for each The automatic air recirculation system 3
influences, such as direct sunlight, are remote control. Use of a remote control will has an air quality sensor to detect harmful
automatically compensated. activate the settings associated with it. ambient gases, in which case it will switch
Manual settings e.g. operating without automatically to recirculation.
Data is shown on the information display.
Setting modifications are briefly shown in cooling and air distribution can be selected When set to automatic mode, the climate
the information display, superimposing using the menu 3 166. control system provides the optimal
over the currently displayed menu. When cooling (air conditioning settings for almost all conditions. If
compressor) is active, air is cooled and necessary, climate control system settings
The format may differ depending on the
dehumidified. can be modified manually.
type of display 3 118.
The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen The climate control system is only
The settings in the climate control system
and spores from the inflowing outside air. operational when the engine is running.
are stored in the vehicle key when the
vehicle is locked, see "Store personal Do not cover the sensor on the instrument
settings in vehicle key" 3 30. panel as this could cause the climate
control 3 system to malfunction.
Cooling (air conditioning compressor)
switches off automatically at low outside
temperatures.
164 Climate control
Switching off the AC compressor

(Eco appears in display) can reduce
comfort and affect safety 3 166.
All air vents are actuated automatically in 90.6 MHz
automatic mode. The air vents should
therefore always be open 3 152.
Automatic air recirculation mode 3
The ventilation system is set to recirculation
mode and interior air is recirculated.
The automatic air recirculation system has
an air quality sensor to detect harmful
gases in the outside air, in which case it will
Picture no: 17000t.tif switch automatically to recirculation. Picture no: 18615t.tif
Automatic mode If outside temperatures are low and Temperature preset
Basic setting for maximum comfort: cooling (air conditioning compressor) is The left rotary knob can be used to set
z Press AUTO button. switched off, automatic air recirculation is temperatures between 16 C and 28 C.
only available in a limited capacity so as to For reasons of comfort, temperature can
z Open all air vents. prevent the windows from misting. Activate only be changed in small increments.
z Switch on A/C compressor 3 166. recirculation manually if so desired.
z Preset temperature to 22 C using left Switching automatic recirculation on or
rotary knob. off 3 168.
The temperature can be set higher or lower Manual air recirculation mode 3 168.
as desired.
Climate control 165
If a temperature below 16 C is set, Lo The air flow can be increased or decreased

appears in the display: the climate control by turning the right knob.
system runs constantly at maximum To return to automatic mode:
cooling power. The temperature is not
regulated.
90.6 MHz press button V or AUTO.
Heated rear window 3 52.
If a temperature above 28 C is set, Hi
appears in the display: the climate control
system runs constantly at maximum
heating power. The temperature is not
regulated.
The temperature setting is saved when the
ignition is switched off.

Window demisting and de-icing
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could

visibility.

temperatures:
Press V button. V appears in display:
control indicator in button illuminates.
Temperature and air distribution adjust
automatically and the fan runs at a higher
speed.
166 Climate control
Climate Air distribut. Climate

Air distribut. Air distribut.
AC AC Air conditioning
Autom. blower Autom. blower on / off
Auto. recirc Auto. recirc

Manual settings in the menu Climate Individual menu items are marked by Activating and deactivating air
Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or turning the centre knob and selected by conditioning compressor
misted windows), the functions of the pressing it. Selecting certain menus by In the Climate menu, select menu item AC
climate control system can be modified pressing the knob will open a submenu 3. and select by pressing.
manually. To exit a menu, turn the centre knob left or Deactivate if no cooling or
Climate control system settings can be right to Return or Main and select. dehumidification is required (maximum
changed via the centre knob, the buttons energy savings): Eco appears in the
and the menus depicted on the display. display. Inflowing air is neither cooled nor
To retrieve the menu, press the central dehumidified. This restricts the level of
rotary knob, the display shows the comfort provided by the electronic climate
menu Climate. control system and may cause the windows
to mist up, for example.
When cooling is on condensation forms,
which is expelled from the underside of the
vehicle.
Climate control 167
Air distribut. FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3 Automatic blower
Strong
90.6 MHz Normal
Weak

Air distribution Air flow Fan control in automatic mode 3
Turn central rotary knob, the menu Turn right knob right or left. The selected Fan regulation in automatic mode can be
Air distribut. is retrieved. The possible fan speed in indicated with x and the modified.
settings for air distribution appear. number in the display. Select menu item Automatic blower from
Up Air distribution to windscreen At speed 0 both the fan and cooling the menu Climate and select the desired
and front door windows. (air conditioning compressor) are fan control.
Centre Air distribution to vehicle switched off.
occupants via front adjustable To return to automatic mode:
vents. Press AUTO button.
Down Air distribution to footwell.
Menu Air distribut. can also be retrieved
via menu Climate.
Return to automatic air distribution:
Deactivate corresponding setting or
press button AUTO.
168 Climate control
Climate
Air distribut.
AC Automatic
Autom. blower recirculation
Residual air conditioning on
Auto. recirc air control at
bad outside air

Switching automatic recirculation 3 Manual air recirculation mode Air conditioning with the engine not
on or off The air recirculation system prevents the running
The automatic air recirculation system has entry of outside air and the air in the If the ignition is off, the heat or cooling
an air quality sensor to detect harmful passenger compartment is circulated. power still in the system can be used to
gases in the outside air, in which case it will Operate with the 4 button. condition the passenger compartment, for
switch automatically to recirculation. example when stopped at a level crossing.
Select menu item Auto. recirc from the 9 Warning Press button AUTO with the ignition off.
menu Climate and switch it on or off by Residual air conditioning on will appear
pressing. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air briefly in the display.
recirculation mode. The quality of the
Switch to manual air recirculation as passenger compartment air deteriorates Afterrun of the climate control system is
necessary. which may cause the vehicle occupants only possible for a limited time. Deactivate
to feel drowsy. In operation without early by pressing the AUTO button.
cooling the air humidity increases, so the
windows may mist up. Consequently, air
recirculation should only be run for short
periods of time.
To deactivate manual air recirculation:

Press button 4 again. The control
indicator in the button will go out.
Climate control 169
Heater Regular operation

On vehicles with Quickheat 3: depending In order to ensure continuously efficient
on the outside temperature and engine performance, the air conditioning system 3
temperature, the passenger compartment must be operated for a few minutes once a
is heated up more quickly using an month, regardless of the weather or time of
auxiliary electric heater. year. The system does not activate cooling
Diesel-engined vehicles have a fuel-driven if outside temperatures are too low.
heater 3. Service
To ensure optimal cooling performance,
we recommend an annual check of the
climate control system starting 3 years
after first registration.
Picture no: 17438t.tif z Functionality and pressure test.
Air intake z Heating functionality.
The air intakes in front of the windscreen in z Check for leaks.
the engine compartment must be kept
clear to allow air intake. Remove any z Check of drive belts.
leaves, dirt or snow. z Cleaning of condenser and evaporator
Cabin air filter drainage.
The cabin air filter cleans dust, soot, pollen z Performance check
and spores from the air entering from
outside. The active carbon layer 3
eliminates most odours and harmful
ambient gases from the air.
170 Driving and operation
Driving and operation Manual transmission

automated 3
The semi-automatic Easytronic
transmission permits manual (manual
mode) or automatic gear shifting
(automatic mode), both with automatic
clutch control.
Manual transmission automated 3 ... 170

Manual transmission ........................... 178
Automatic transmission 3 .................. 178
ActiveSelect 3 ................................... 183 Transmission display
Driving hints ......................................... 188 Shows the mode and current gear.
Saving fuel,
protecting the environment ............. 190 T is illuminated when the Winter
programme is on.
Fuels, refuelling.................................... 192
Catalytic converter, engine exhaust .. 194 The display flashes for a few seconds when
Drive Control Systems ......................... 198 A, M or R is selected with the engine
Hydraulic brake system ...................... 210 running and the foot brake not activated.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS u) .... 211
Hand brake .......................................... 212
Brake assist .......................................... 212
Hill Start Assist 3 (HSA) ...................... 212
Wheels, tyres ........................................ 212
Roof racks 3......................................... 219
Towing equipment 3........................... 220
Towing equipment with removable
coupling ball bar 3 ........................... 220
Caravan/trailer towing ........................ 223
Driving and operation 171
There is no need to select neutral before

starting the engine. If a gear is engaged,
the transmission automatically switches to
neutral (N) before the engine starts when
the foot brake is operated. This can lead to
a slight delay in the starting process.

Starting the engine
Operating the manual transmission
Operate foot brake when starting the
automated with the selector lever
engine. The engine can only be started
Always move the selector lever in the
with the foot brake operated. "N" appears
appropriate direction as far as it will go.
in the transmission display. If the foot
Upon release, it automatically returns to
brake is not operated the control
the centre position. Pay heed to the
indicator j 3 illuminates on the
gear/mode indicator in the transmission
instrument panel, and "N" flashes in the
display.
transmission display - the engine cannot
be started. Move selector lever toward N
Neutral.
Also the vehicle cannot be started if all
brake lights have failed.
It is also possible to start off without

depressing the foot brake if the accelerator
pedal is operated directly after movement
of the selector lever. If there is no
immediate acceleration or the foot brake is
not depressed, no gear is engaged and "A"
flashes. After a few seconds, the display
resumes showing "N". Start off by
repeating the previously described
procedure.
In Automatic mode, selection of other
gears is automatic irrespective of driving
conditions.
Picture no: 18616t.tif Move selector lever toward A Picture no: 17002t.tif
Starting off Switch between Automatic and Manual Move selector lever toward + or -
Depress the foot brake, release the hand mode. + Shift to a higher gear.
brake and move the selector lever to A, +
Manual gear shifting is possible in manual - Shift to a lower gear.
or -. The manual transmission automated
is in automatic mode and first gear is mode. "M" and the currently engaged gear If a higher gear is selected when the
engaged (second gear if the Winter appear in the transmission display. running speed is too low, or a lower gear
programme is active). "A1" appears in the If the engine speed is too low the manual when the speed is too high, no shift is
transmission display ("A2" if the Winter transmission automated will automatically effected. This prevents the engine from
programme is active). shift to a lower gear even in manual mode. running at too low or too high revs.
The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot This prevents the engine from stalling. Gears can be skipped by moving the
brake is released. selector lever repeatedly at short intervals.
If the vehicle is in automatic mode, on Stopping the vehicle Electronically controlled driving
movement of the selector lever to + or - In Automatic or Manual mode, when the programmes
manual transmission automated shifts to vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter z After a cold start, the operating
manual mode and changes up or down. mode engaged, second gear) is engaged temperature programme automatically
"M" and the currently engaged gear automatically and the clutch released. In R increases engine speed to quickly bring
appear in the transmission display. reverse remains engaged. the catalytic converter to operating
Move selector lever toward R A warning buzzer sounds when the drivers temperature.
Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is door is opened if the engine is running, a z The adaptive programme automatically
stationary. gear is engaged and the foot brake is not tailors gearshifting to the driving
Depress the foot brake, release the hand depressed. The vehicle creeps if the hand conditions, e.g. greater load and
brake and move the selector lever to R. brake is not engaged. Move the selector gradients.
Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appears in lever to N and apply the hand brake.
the transmission display. When stopping on gradients, engage the
The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot hand brake or depress the brake pedal. To
brake is released. prevent overheating of the clutch, do not
increase engine speed to ensure smooth
It is also possible to start off in reverse idling when in gear.
without depressing the foot brake if the
accelerator pedal is operated directly after To prevent damage to the manual
movement of the selector lever. If there is transmission automated, the clutch is
no immediate acceleration or the foot closed automatically at high clutch
brake is not depressed, no gear is engaged temperatures.
and "R" flashes. After a few seconds, the Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
display resumes showing "N". Start off by period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level
repeating the previously described crossings.
procedure.
Picture no: 17961t.tif Picture no: 17175t.tif Picture no: 18451s.tif

z When SPORT mode is engaged, shift Winter programme T Kickdown
times are reduced and the transmission In the event of difficulties starting off At certain engine speeds, pressing the
shifts at higher engine speeds (unless on slippery roads, press button T accelerator pedal past the pressure point
cruise control is on). SPORT mode 3 200. ("A", currently engaged gear and T will cause the transmission to shift down to
appear in the transmission display). The a lower gear.
manual transmission automated switches During kickdown no manual gear shifting is
to automatic mode and the vehicle sets off possible.
in second gear.
The Winter programme is deactivated by:
z pressing button T again,
z turning off the ignition,
z changing to manual mode,
z if clutch temperature is too high.
If the Winter programme is activated,
SPORT mode is deactivated.
When the engine speed approaches its "Rocking the car"

upper limit, the transmission shifts to a If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
higher gear during kickdown even in to free it from sand, mud, snow or a trough,
Manual mode. move the selector lever between R and A
Without kickdown this automatic shift is (or + or -) in a repeat pattern while applying
not effected in Manual mode. light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do
not race the engine and avoid sudden
If SPORT mode is engaged, the drive acceleration.
wheels may spin slightly when starting off
with kickdown. This allows for maximum
acceleration of the vehicle.
Engine braking
Automatic mode
When driving downhill, the manual Picture no: 18230s.tif
transmission automated does not shift into Manoeuvring the vehicle
higher gears until a fairly high engine To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth
speed has been reached. When braking, it during attempts to park or in garage
shifts down in good time. entrances the creeping movement can
Manual mode be utilised by releasing the foot brake.
To utilise the engine braking effect, select a Never actuate accelerator and brake
lower gear in good time when driving pedals simultaneously.
downhill.
To prevent damage, the manual
transmission automated disengages
the "creep function" when the temperature
of the automatic clutch is high.
Vehicle storage
Apply hand brake and remove the ignition
key or, with the Open&Start system 3,
remove the electronic key from the vehicle.
The most recently engaged gear (indicator
in transmission display) remains engaged.
With N, no gear is engaged.
When the ignition is switched off the
manual transmission automated no longer
responds to movement of the selector
lever.
Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery
may become discharged if the vehicle is Picture no: 17028t.tif Picture no: 17178t.tif
parked for long periods. Fault Interruption of power supply
If the hand brake has not been applied, the To prevent damage to the manual If the power supply is interrupted and a
control indicator R flashes for a few transmission automated, the clutch is gear is engaged, the clutch will not
seconds after the ignition is switched off. closed automatically at high clutch disengage. The vehicle cannot move.
temperatures. If the battery is discharged, perform
With the engine off and the hand brake not
applied, when the drivers door is opened a In the event of a fault, control indicator A starting assist 3 227.
warning buzzer sounds and the control illuminates. Continued travel is possible.
indicator R flashes; switch on ignition, Manual mode can no longer be selected.
engage gear, switch off ignition and apply If "F" appears in the transmission display,
hand brake. continued driving is not possible.
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a
workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated
into the system facilitates rapid fault
identification.
If the cause is not a discharged battery, 3. Clean the transmission around the cap 6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must be
contact a workshop. If the vehicle must be (see figure) so that no dirt can get into in full contact with the housing.
removed from the flow of traffic, release the opening when the cap is removed.
the clutch on vehicles with 5-speed manual Caution
4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by
transmission automated. On vehicles with lifting upwards, see figure.
6-speed manual transmission automated, Towing the vehicle and starting the
the clutch cannot be released 3; if the 5. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise using engine is not permitted when the clutch
vehicle must be moved, raise the vehicle at a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 has been released in this way, although
the front to tow. 3 236) until clear resistance can be felt. the vehicle can be moved a short
The clutch has now been disengaged. distance.
Release the clutch (only for vehicles with
5-speed manual transmission automated) Caution Contact a workshop immediately for
1. Apply hand brake and switch off assistance.
ignition. Do not turn beyond the resistance,
2. Open bonnet and engage support since this can damage the manual
3 226. transmission automated.
Automatic transmission 3
The automatic transmission 3 allows
automatic selection.

Manual transmission Transmission display
To engage reverse gear, with the vehicle Display of mode or selected gear in left
stationary, wait 3 seconds after position of transmission display. The gear
declutching, press in the button on the that has been selected by the transmission
selector lever and engage the gear. appears in the right position of the
transmission display.
If the gear does not engage, release the
clutch, depress the clutch pedal again and 1 is illuminated when SPORT mode is
repeat gear selection. active.
Do not slip the clutch unnecessarily. T is illuminated when the Winter
programme is on.
Operate the clutch pedal by depressing it
fully. Do not use the pedal as a footrest
(increases clutch wear).
The selector lever can only be moved from When a gear is engaged, the vehicle slowly
P or N when the ignition is switched on and starts to move when the brake pedal is
the foot brake depressed (selector lever released.
lock). Gears 3, 2, 1
To engage P or R, push button on selector 3, 2, 1 Transmission does not shift above
lever. the selected gear.
The engine can only be started with lever in
Press button on selector lever to engage 3
position P or N. When position N is selected,
or 1.
press foot brake or engage hand brake
before starting. Only select 3, 2 or 1 to prevent automatic
upshifting or as an aid in engine braking.
Do not accelerate when selecting a gear.
Do not operate the accelerator and brake
Picture no: 17189t.tif pedals simultaneously.
Selector lever positions P, R, N and D
P Park position. Front wheels locked.
Only engage when the vehicle is
stationary and the hand brake is
applied.
R Reverse gear. Engage only when
vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral.
D Position for normal driving in 1st to
the highest gear.
z After a cold start, the operating

temperature programme automatically
increases engine speed to quickly bring
the catalytic converter to operating
temperature.
z The adaptive programme automatically
tailors gearshifting to the driving
conditions, e.g. greater load or
gradients.

Electronically controlled driving Winter programme T
programmes In the event of difficulties starting off on
z When SPORT mode is engaged, the slippery road surfaces, activate the Winter
transmission shifts at higher engine revs programme.
(unless cruise control is on). Control To activate
indicator 1 illuminates in the Press button T in P, R, N, D or 3. The
transmission display 3 178. vehicle starts off in 3nd gear.
Sport mode 3 200. To deactivate
z Automatic neutral shift function The Winter programme is deactivated by:
automatically sets the transmission to z pressing button T again,
neutral the vehicle is stopped in a z manual selection of 2 or 1,
forward gear (depending on
transmission fluid temperature). z turning off the ignition,
z transmission fluid temperature too high.
Engine braking Stopping the vehicle

In order to utilise the engine braking effect The selector lever can be left in the chosen
when driving downhill, select drive range 3, gear with the engine running.
2 or, if necessary, 1 in good time. When stopping on gradients engage hand
Braking effect is greatest in gear 1. If gear brake or depress brake pedal. To prevent
1 is selected at too high a speed, the overheating of the transmission, do not
transmission remains in second gear until increase engine revolutions to ensure
the shift point for first gear is reached. smooth idling while standing if a gear has
"Rocking the car" been selected.
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
to free it from sand, mud, snow or a trough, period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level
move the selector lever from D to R in a crossings.
repeat pattern while simultaneously Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the
Picture no: 18451s.tif applying light pressure to the accelerator
Kickdown hand brake. Then select P. Remove the
pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid ignition key or, with Open&Start system,
At certain engine speeds, pressing the sudden acceleration.
accelerator pedal past the pressure point remove the electronic key 3 from the
will cause the transmission to shift down to vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the
a lower gear. battery may become discharged if the
vehicle is parked up for long periods.
The ignition key can only be removed when
the selector lever is in position P.
With the Open&Start system 3, "P" flashes
in the transmission display for 10 seconds
when the ignition is switched off if P has not
been engaged or the hand brake has not
been applied.

Fault Interruption of power supply 3. Push the yellow catch forward with a
Control indicator A illuminates in the If the power supply is interrupted, the screwdriver and move the selector lever
event of a fault. The transmission no longer selector lever cannot be moved out of out of P.
shifts automatically. Continued driving is position P. 4. Mount selector lever trim on centre
possible. If the battery is discharged, perform console and refit.
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a starting assist 3 227. Reselecting P causes locking again. Have a
workshop. If the battery is not the cause of the fault, workshop eliminate the cause of the power
2nd gear is not available. Manual release selector lever: loss.
gearshifting: 1. Apply hand brake.
1 = 1st gear
2 = 3rd gear 2. Release selector lever trim from centre
3, D = 4th gear console at rear, fold upwards and rotate
to the left.

ActiveSelect 3
This automatic transmission 3 allows both
automatic gearchanges (automatic
mode) and manual gearchanges
(manual mode) 3.

Transmission display Selector lever settings P, R, N and D
Display of mode or selected gear in left (automatic mode)
position of transmission display. The gear P Park position. Front wheels locked.
that has been selected by the transmission Only engage when the vehicle is
appears in the right position. stationary and the hand brake is
On vehicles with the Open&Start system 3, applied.
when the ignition is switched off "P" flashes R Reverse gear. Engage only when
in the transmission display if P is not vehicle is stationary.
engaged or the hand brake is not applied.
N Neutral.
1 is illuminated when SPORT mode is
active. D Automatic mode with all gears.
T is illuminated when the Winter

The selector lever can only be moved out of
programme is on.
position P or N with the ignition switched on
and the foot brake applied (selector lever
lock). In selector lever position N the
selector lever lock is activated after a delay
and only if the vehicle is stationary.
If engine speed is too low, the transmission

automatically shifts to a lower gear above
a specific vehicle speed.
No automatic shifting to a higher gear
takes place at high engine revs.
For safety reasons, kickdown is also
available in manual mode 3 186.

In position P or N, control indicator j ActiveSelect (manual mode)
illuminates red in the selector lever Shift the selector lever from D first to the left
indicator strip if the selector lever is and then forward or rearward.
blocked.
+ Shift to a higher gear.
If the selector lever is not in position P when - Shift to a lower gear.
the ignition has been switched off, control
indicator j and P in the gear indicator If a higher gear is selected when vehicle
strip both flash. speed is too low, or a lower gear when
vehicle speed is too high, the shift is not
To engage P or R, push button on selector executed.
lever.
The engine can only be started with lever in
position P or N. When position N is selected,
press foot brake or engage hand brake
before starting.
Do not accelerate when selecting a gear.
Do not operate the accelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously.
When a gear is engaged, the vehicle slowly
starts to move when the brake pedal is
released.
z After a cold start, the operating

temperature programme automatically
increases engine speed to quickly bring
the catalytic converter to operating
temperature.
z The adaptive programme automatically
tailors gearshifting to the driving
conditions, e.g. greater load or
gradients.

Electronically controlled driving Winter programme T
programmes In the event of difficulties starting off on
z When SPORT mode is engaged, the slippery road surfaces, activate the Winter
vehicle shifts at higher engine speeds programme.
(unless cruise control is on). To activate
Sport mode 3 200. In automatic mode, press the T button.
z Automatic neutral shift function Depending on road conditions, the vehicles
automatically sets the transmission to starts off in 2nd or 3rd gear.
neutral the vehicle is stopped in a To deactivate
forward gear (depending on The Winter programme is deactivated by:
transmission fluid temperature). z pressing button T again,
z changing to manual mode 3,
z turning off the ignition,
z transmission fluid temperature too high.
Stopping the vehicle The ignition key can only be removed when
The selector lever can be left in the chosen the selector lever is in position P.
gear with the engine running. If the selector lever is not in position P when
When stopping on gradients engage hand the ignition is switched off, control
brake or depress brake pedal. To prevent indicator j and P flash in the selector lever
overheating of the transmission, do not indicator strip 3 184, Fig. 17194 T. Move
increase engine revolutions to ensure the selector lever to position P.
smooth idling while standing if a gear has With the Open&Start system 3, "P" flashes
been selected. in the transmission display for 10 seconds
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy when the ignition is switched off if P has not
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level been engaged or the hand brake has not
crossings. been applied.
Picture no: 18451s.tif Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the
Kickdown hand brake. Then select P. Remove the
At certain engine speeds, pressing the ignition key or, with Open&Start system,
accelerator pedal past the pressure point remove the electronic key 3 from the
will cause the transmission to shift down to vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the
a lower gear. battery may become discharged if the
vehicle is parked up for long periods.
Engine braking
To utilise the engine braking effect, select a
lower gear in good time when driving
downhill.
"Rocking the car"
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from sand, mud, snow or a trough,
move the selector lever from D to R in a
repeat pattern while simultaneously
applying light pressure to the accelerator
pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
sudden acceleration.

Fault Interruption of power supply 3. To open, push the yellow catch down
Control indicator A illuminates in the In the event of an interruption of power with a screwdriver and move the selector
event of a fault. The transmission no longer supply, the selector lever cannot be moved lever out of P or N.
shifts automatically. Continued driving is out of the P or N position. 4. Insert ashtray insert 3 or rubber mat on
possible. If the battery is discharged, perform bottom of stowage compartment 3
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a starting assist 3 227. 3 105.
workshop. If the battery is not the cause of the fault, Reselecting P or N causes locking again.
2nd gear and the highest gear can be release selector lever: Have a workshop eliminate the cause of
selected in manual mode. Depending on 1. Apply hand brake. the power loss.
the nature of the problem, only the highest
gear may be available. 2. Remove ashtray insert 3 or rubber mat
on bottom of stowage compartment 3
Only the highest gear is available in D in 3 105.
automatic mode.
Driving hints Brake servo unit Driving with a roof load

The first 1000 km When the engine is not running, the brake Do not exceed the permissible roof load
Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do servo unit is no longer effective once the 3 219, 3 311. For reasons of safety,
not use full throttle. Never allow the engine brake pedal has been depressed once or distribute the load evenly and secure it
to labour at low revs. twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but properly with retaining straps. Adjust the
significantly greater force is required for tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not
Make good use of all gears. Depress the braking. drive faster than 120 km/h. Check and
accelerator pedal a maximum of around retighten the straps frequently. Observe
three quarters of the available pedal travel Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering
If the power-assisted steering fails when country-specific regulations. Roof loads
in all gears. are not permitted on the Astra TwinTop.
being towed with the engine switched off,
Do not drive faster than three quarters of the vehicle can still be steered, but Switching off the engine
maximum speed. considerably more force is required. When you switch off, fans in the engine
Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the Driving in mountainous terrain or with a compartment may continue running for
first 200 km. trailer/caravan a time to cool the engine.
Never coast with engine not running The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.
Many units will not function in this situation cooling power is therefore independent of after driving in mountainous terrain: allow
(e.g. brake servo unit, electro-hydraulic the engine speed. the engine to idle for approximately two
power steering). Driving in this manner is a Since a considerable amount of heat is minutes in order to prevent heat
danger to yourself and others. generated at high engine speeds and less accumulation.
During the first drive smoke may develop at slower speeds, do not shift down when Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3
because of wax and oil evaporating on the climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping After running at high engine speeds or high
exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the with the gradient in the higher gear. engine loads, operate the engine briefly at
open for a while after the first drive and a low load or run in neutral for approx.
avoid inhaling the fumes. 30 seconds before switching off in order
to protect the turbocharger.
Fuel and engine oil consumption are higher
during the running-in period.
Save energy more kilometres Warming up Cooling fan

Please observe the running-in hints on the After a cold start, the automatic The cooling fan is controlled via a
previous page and the tips for saving transmission 3 or manual transmission thermoswitch and therefore only runs if
energy on the following pages. automated 3 in automatic mode shifts into necessary.
Good, technically correct and economical higher gears at higher rpm. This allows the The cooling fan automatically switches on
driving ensures maximum durability and catalytic converter to quickly reach the when the diesel particle filter is being
performance for your vehicle. temperature required for optimum cleaned 3 depending on the engine.
pollutant reduction.
Overrun cut-off Pedals
The fuel supply is automatically shut off Correct gear selection Do not place any objects in the foot well
during overrun, e.g. when a gear is Engine in neutral and without revving in the which could slip under the pedals and
engaged and the accelerator pedal is not lower gears. Stop-and-go traffic and inhibit the pedal travel.
operated. Overrun cut-off is not activated driving at a speed too high for the selected
gear or transmission ratio increases wear To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,
if catalytic converter temperature is high. there must be no mats in the area of the
and fuel consumption.
Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3 pedals.
Flow-generated noises may be audible if Change down
When decreasing speed, shift down into Battery care
the accelerator is released quickly on When driving slowly or when the vehicle is
account of air flow in the turbocharger. the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch
with a high-revving engine. This is stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stop-
Engine speed especially important when hill climbing. and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all
Drive in a low engine speed range for each unnecessary electrical loads where
gear as much as possible. possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated
front seats).
Declutch when starting in order to relieve
the strain on the starter and the battery.
Saving fuel, End-of-life vehicle recovery Warming up

protecting the environment Information on end-of-life vehicle recovery z Full throttle and warming up at idle
Trend-setting technology centres and the recycling of end-of-life speed increase wear, fuel consumption,
In the development and manufacture of vehicles is available at www.opel.com. exhaust emission, the amount of
your vehicle, environmentally-friendly and Energy and environment-conscious pollutant in the exhaust and the
in the main recyclable materials were used. driving amount of noise.
The production methods used to make z High noise levels and exhaust emissions z Drive off as soon as possible after
your vehicle are likewise environmentally- are often a result of driving without due starting.
friendly. attention to saving energy and Uniform speed
Recycling of production wastes keeps the protecting the environment. z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel
circulation of material closed. Reduction of z You should therefore drive with energy consumption, the exhaust emissions, the
energy and water requirements also helps in mind "more miles with less fuel". proportion of pollutant in the exhaust
to conserve natural resources. Reduce the noise level and exhaust gas and the noise level.
A highly advanced design means that your emissions by adopting an environment- z Do not accelerate and brake
vehicle can be easily disassembled at the conscious driving style. This is extremely unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed,
end of its working life, and the individual worthwhile and improves the quality of watching the road.
materials separated for subsequent re-use. life. Avoid frequent starting off and stopping
Materials such as asbestos and cadmium Fuel consumption depends to a great e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance
are not used. The refrigerant in the air extent on your own personal driving traffic and in queues of traffic by means
conditioning system 3 is CFC-free. style. The following hints are intended of clever planning. Select roads with
New painting techniques employ water as to help you consume fuel at a rate that good traffic flow.
a solvent. is as close as possible to the specified Idling
levels 3 302. z The engine also consumes fuel when
Check your vehicles fuel consumption idling.
every time you refuel. This facilitates z If you have to wait for more than one
early detection of any irregularities minute, it is worthwhile switching off
causing increased fuel consumption. the engine. Five minutes of idling
corresponds to approximately one
kilometre of driving.
Overrun z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal Repair and maintenance

z The fuel supply is automatically shut off results in distinct fuel savings with no z Improper repairs or adjustment and
in overrun, e.g. when driving downhill or major loss of speed. maintenance work can increase fuel
braking 3 189. consumption. Do not carry out work on
Drive at no more than around three
z To enable the overrun cut-off to come the engine yourself.
quarters of maximum speed and you will
into action and save fuel, do not use up to 50 % less fuel, without losing a You may out of ignorance infringe
accelerate or declutch during overrun. great deal of time. environmental laws by not disposing of
Correct gear selection materials properly.
Tyre pressure
z High revs increase engine wear and fuel z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to Appropriate parts might not be recycled.
consumption. higher road resistance, costs money in Contact with some of the materials
z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at two ways: for more fuel and increased involved may pose a health hazard.
high engine speeds. tyre wear.
z We recommend that repair and
Making use of the tachometer helps to z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off. maintenance be entrusted to your Opel
save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed Electrical loads Partner.
range for each gear as much as possible z The power consumption of electrical Extreme driving conditions
with uniform engine speeds. Drive as equipment increases fuel consumption. z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving
often as possible in top gear, select the on poor roads and winter driving all
z Switch off all auxiliary electrical loads
next higher gear as soon as possible, increase fuel consumption.
(e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear
and only change down when the engine
window) when not needed. Fuel consumption increases dramatically
is no longer running perfectly smoothly.
Roof racks, ski-holders in urban traffic and at winter
High speed temperatures, especially on short trips
z Due to air resistance, a roof load
z The higher the speed, the higher the when the engine operating temperature
can increase fuel consumption by
consumption and the noise level. At top is not reached.
approx. 1 l/100 km.
speed, you consume a great deal of fuel
and produce excessive noise and z Remove them if they are not being used. z Follow the above-mentioned hints to
exhaust emissions. minimise consumption under such
conditions.
Fuels, refuelling Fuel for diesel engines

Fuel consumption Use only diesel fuel which meets the
Fuel consumption is determined under requirements of DIN EN 590. The fuel must
specific driving conditions 3 302. have a low sulphur content (max. 50 ppm).
Equivalent-standard fuels with a biodiesel
Special equipment increases the weight of content (= FAME in accordance with
the vehicle. As a result, they can increase DIN EN 14214) of max. 7 per cent by
fuel consumption and reduce the specified volume (as per DIN 51628 or equivalent
maximum speed. standards) may be used.
For the first few thousand kilometres, Do not use marine diesel fuels, heating oils
friction between the engine and or entirely or partially plant-based diesel
transmission components is higher. This fuels, such as rape seed oil or biodiesel,
increases fuel consumption. Aquazole and similar diesel-water
Fuel for petrol engines emulsions. Diesel fuels must not be diluted Picture no: 17197t.tif
Only use unleaded fuel that complies with with fuels that are intended for petrol Fuel filler cap
DIN EN 228. engines. Only the original fuel filler cap ensures full
Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5 % The flow performance and filtration ability functionality. Diesel-engined vehicles have
must not be used unless the vehicle has of diesel fuel are dependent upon a special fuel filler cap.
been specifically developed and approved temperature. At low temperatures, use Refuelling
for these fuels. diesel fuel with guaranteed winter
properties 9 Warning
Use fuel with the recommended octane
rating (value in bold 3 294, 3 295). Use of Before refuelling, switch off the engine
fuel with too low an octane rating can and any auxiliary heating with
reduce engine power and torque and combustion chambers 3 (see sticker on
slightly increases fuel consumption. tank flap). Switch off mobile phones.
Caution Follow the operating and safety
instructions of the filling station when
Use of fuel with too low an octane rating refuelling.
could lead to uncontrolled combustion
and engine damage.
Correct filling depends to a large extent on

9 Warning proper operation of the fuel dispensing
pump:
Fuel is flammable and explosive. No
smoking. No naked flames or sparks. 1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch
If fuel odours are noticed inside the it on.
vehicle, have the cause remedied by a 2. After automatic switch off, the specified
workshop immediately. tank capacity is reached after continued,
measured filling. Leave the filler nozzle in
place until the stop.
To close, position the fuel filler cap and
rotate past the resistance until the cap
audibly clicks over the retainer.
Picture no: 17198t.tif Close fuel tank cover.
Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle.
The tank flap is locked together with the Caution
doors 3 38. Wipe off any overflowing fuel
Open the tank flap. immediately.
Unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and
suspend from the tank flap.
The fuel tank has a limiting system which
prevents overfilling of the tank.
z If the event of misfiring, irregular engine

running, clear loss of engine power or
other uncommon operating faults, have
the cause of the fault remedied
immediately by a workshop. In an
emergency, the vehicle can be driven
briefly at low vehicle and engine speed.
This does not apply when the Electronic
Stability Program ESPPlus 3 3 198
comes into action.
z If unburned fuel enters the catalytic
converter of a petrol-engined vehicle,
this may result in overheating and
Picture no: 17199t.tif irreparable damage to the catalytic Picture no: 17004t.tif
Catalytic converter, converter. Controlling exhaust emission
engine exhaust Some of the damaging substances in the
You should therefore avoid exhaust such as carbon monoxide (CO),
Catalytic converter unnecessarily long use of the starter,
Some of the harmful substances in the hydrocarbons (HC) and nitrous oxides
running the tank dry and starting the (NOx) are reduced to a minimum by
exhaust, such as carbon monoxide (CO), engine by pushing or towing.
hydrocarbons (CH) and nitrous oxides making structural changes mainly in the
(NOx), are reduced thanks to the catalytic injection system and the ignition system in
converter. conjunction with the catalytic converter.
High quality fuels other than those listed on

pages 192, 294, 295 (e.g. LRP = Lead
Replacement Petrol or leaded fuel) could
damage the catalytic converter and
components of the electronics.
Caution
Damage to the catalytic converter or the
vehicle may result if the following points
are not observed.
If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it

is of no significance.
Illumination of A can indicate water in the
diesel fuel filter 3, at the same time a
message appears in the service display
3 116. Have a workshop check the fuel
filter for possible water residue.
If it flashes after the ignition is switched on,
there is a fault in the immobiliser system.
The engine cannot be started 3 29.

Control indicator Z for exhaust Control indicator A for engine electronics
Illuminates when the ignition is switched on Illuminates for a few seconds after the
and during the start attempt. Goes off ignition is switched on.
shortly after the engine starts running. If it illuminates when the engine is running,
Illuminated with the engine running there is a fault in engine or transmission
indicates a fault in the exhaust gas electronics. The electronic system switches
cleaning system. The permitted emissions to an emergency running programme. Fuel
may be exceeded. Contact a workshop consumption may be increased and the
immediately. driveability of the vehicle may be impaired.
Flashing with the engine running indicates In some cases, faults can be eliminated by
a fault which could lead to catalytic switching off the engine and restarting. If
converter damage. You may continue the control light comes on again when the
driving without damage if you back off engine is running, contact a workshop to
until flashing stops and the control eliminate the cause of the fault.
indicator comes on. Contact a workshop
immediately.
Engine exhaust Diesel particle filter 3

The diesel particle filter system filters
9 Warning damaging soot particles out of the engine
exhaust. The system has a self-cleaning
Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous function that runs automatically while the
carbon monoxide, which is colourless vehicle is in motion. The filter is cleaned by
and odourless and could be fatal if burning off the residual soot particles at
inhaled. high temperature. This procedure runs
If exhaust gases penetrate the vehicle automatically and can take up to
interior, open a window and contact a 25 minutes. Fuel consumption may
workshop. increase during this time. The odour and
Avoid driving with an open tailgate. the smoke that are generated are normal.
Otherwise, exhaust gases could
penetrate the interior.
The system cannot clean itself
automatically under certain driving
conditions such as short-distance driving.
If the filter needs to be cleaned and
automatic cleaning could not take place
under the latest driving conditions, control
indicator ! flashes. Continue driving and
try to keep the engine speed above
2000 rpm. Change down a gear if
necessary. Diesel particle filter cleaning
starts.
Maintenance
Have all maintenance work carried out at
the intervals specified. We recommend
that you entrust this work to your Opel
Partner, who has proper equipment and
trained personnel available. Electronic
testing systems permit rapid diagnosis and
remedy of faults. This way you can be
certain that all components of the vehicles
electrical, injection and ignition systems
operate correctly, that your vehicle has a
low level of pollutant emission and that the
catalytic converter system will have a long
service life.
We recommend that you continue driving The control indicator ! goes off as soon as You are thereby making an important
while cleaning is in progress and do not the self-cleaning operation is complete. contribution towards keeping the air clean
switch the ignition off. Cleaning is faster at and compliance with emissions legislation.
high engine speeds and loads. Checking and adjustment of the fuel-
injection and ignition systems is part of the
scope of inspection. For this reason you
should have all maintenance work carried
out at the intervals specified in your Service
and Warranty Booklet.
Drive Control Systems Electronic Stability Programme ESPPlus is ready for operation as soon as
Interactive Driving System (= IDS+) 3 (ESPPlus) 3 the ignition is switched on and control
IDS+ unites the sensors and control units of ESPPlus improves driving stability in any indicator v goes out.
the Electronic Stability Program (ESPPlus), driving situation regardless of the type of When ESPPlus comes into action,
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) and road surface or tyre grip. It also prevents v flashes.
Continuous Damping Control (CDC). This the drive wheels from spinning.
The vehicle is now in a critical situation;
provides both excellent driving dynamics As soon as the vehicle starts to ESPPlus allows you to keep control of the
and greater safety. swerve(understeers/oversteers) engine vehicle and reminds you to match your
output is reduced and the wheels are speed to the road conditions.
braked individually. This considerably
improves the driving stability of the vehicle 9 Warning
on slippery road surfaces.
Do not let this special safety feature
tempt you into taking risks when driving.
ESPPlus does not negate the laws of
physics.
Adapt your speed to road conditions.
Illuminates while driving

The system is switched off or a fault is
present. Continued driving is possible. The
driving stability can however deteriorate
depending on road surface conditions.
Re-engage ESPPlus or have the cause of
the fault eliminated by a workshop. The
self-diagnosis integrated into the system
facilitates rapid fault identification.
Switching off 3
With SPORT mode 3 engaged (LED in
SPORT button illuminated), the ESPPlus
can be disengaged for sports
Picture no: 17200t.tif performance. Picture no: 17961t.tif
Control indicator v Hold the SPORT button depressed for ESPPlus is reactivated by pressing the
The control indicator illuminates for a few around 4 seconds. Control indicator v will SPORT button again or switching on the
seconds when the ignition is switched on. illuminate. ESPoff will also appear in the ignition.
The system is now ready for operation. service display 3 116. Sport mode 3 200.
Flashing during driving
This shows the system has come into 9 Warning
action. The engine output may be reduced Plus
(the sound of the engine changes) and the ESP should not be deactivated if
vehicle may be braked automatically to a one of the run-flat tyres 3 has no
small degree. pressure.
Continuous Damping Control 3 SPORT mode 3

(CDC) SPORT mode is used to change
CDC adapts damping of each shock damping 3, steering 3, throttle
absorber to the current driving situation application 3 and the shift point for
and road conditions. automatic transmission 3 and Easytronic 3
The system continually monitors wheel and while driving.
vehicle movements and immediately Damping and steering become more direct
modifies the damping of each shock and provide better contact with the road
absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally surface. The engine reacts more quickly to
adapted to the driving situation and road accelerator movements.
conditions. For automatic transmission 3 and manual
When SPORT mode is enabled the transmission automated 3, the shift times
damping control is adapted for a sportier are reduced and gear changes occur at
driving style. This adaptation leads to Picture no: 17201t.tif higher engine speeds (not when cruise
"harder" chassis calibration. Control indicator IDS+ for Continuous control is on).
Damping Control
SPORT mode - see right column. Lights for around 10 seconds after opening
the drivers door. Illumination during
driving indicates a fault in the system.
The system is not functioning. For safety
reasons, switches to the harder chassis
setting. Have the cause of the fault
eliminated by a workshop. The self-
diagnosis integrated into the system
To deactivate
Briefly press the SPORT button again or
switch off the ignition. The LED in the
button goes out.
Holding it pressed switches off ESPPlus
3 199. SPORT mode remains engaged.
Switching the Winter programme on 3
(vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or
manual transmission automated 3)
deactivates SPORT mode.
Winter programme 3 174, 3 180, 3 185.

To activate Control indicator IDS+ for SPORT mode
Press the SPORT button. The LED in the Lights for around 10 seconds after opening
button illuminates. the drivers door. Illumination during driving
In vehicles with automatic transmission 3 indicates a fault in the system. The system
or manual transmission automated 3 is not functioning. Have the cause of the
control indicator 1 illuminates in the fault eliminated by a workshop. The self-
transmission display. diagnosis integrated into the system
If the Winter programme has been
enabled 3 (vehicles with automatic
transmission 3 or manual transmission
automated 3) SPORT mode cannot be
enabled. Winter programme 3 174, 3 180,
3 185.
Cruise control 3 With automatic transmission 3, only use

Cruise control can store and maintain cruise control in D. With manual
speeds between 30 and 200 km/h. transmission automated 3, only use it in
Deviation from the stored speed may occur automatic mode.
when driving up or downhill.
For safety reasons the cruise control 9 Warning
cannot be activated until the foot brake When the cruise control is active,
has been operated once. reaction times may be increased due to
Cruise control is operated with buttons m, the different position of the feet.
g, and on the turn signal stalk.
Do not use the cruise control if it is not
advisable to maintain a constant speed
(e.g. in situations presenting a danger to Picture no: 17202t.tif
yourself and other road users, in heavy Control indicator m
traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy When driving, control indicator m will
roads). illuminates as soon as the system is
switched on.
Increase To deactivate
With cruise control active, hold down Tap the button: cruise control is
button m or briefly press it repeatedly: switched off.
speed is increased continuously or in Automatic deactivation:
steps of 2 km/h.
z speed is below approx. 30 km/h
When button m is released the current
speed is stored and maintained. z the brake pedal is depressed
Decelerate z the clutch pedal 3 is depressed
With cruise control active, hold down z selector lever of automatic
button g or briefly press it repeatedly: transmission 3 or manual
speed is reduced continuously or in transmission automated 3 in N.
steps of 2 km/h.
Stored speed
Picture no: 16990t.tif When button g is released the current The speed is stored until the ignition is
To activate speed is stored and maintained. switched off.
Briefly press button m: the current speed is To reactivate the stored speed, press
stored and maintained. The accelerator button g at a speed over 30 km/h.
pedal can be released.
Vehicle speed can be increased by
depressing the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is released, the
previously stored speed is resumed.
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when

reversing, a series of signals can be heard
in the vehicle interior. The interval between
the signals becomes shorter as the
distance is reduced. If the distance is less
than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous.
9 Warning
Under certain circumstances, various

reflective surfaces on objects or clothing
as well as external noise sources may
cause the system to fail to detect
obstacles.
Ultrasonic parking sensors 3 To activate To deactivate
Park pilot makes reverse parking easier If the ignition is on, the system activates The system deactivates automatically
by measuring the distance between the automatically when reverse gear is when reverse gear is disengaged.
vehicle and an obstacle in the rear. It is engaged. To deactivate the system when reverse
the driver, however, who maintains full Its operational readiness is indicated by gear is engaged, press button r. The
responsibility for parking. illumination of the LED in button r. LED in the button goes out.
The system records the distance using To reactivate, press button r again.
four sensors in the rear bumper.
Flashing:
The fault is due to sensors obstructed
with snow or ice. The sensors must be
undamaged and free of dirt, snow and ice.
Interference due to external sources of
ultra sound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary
machines). Once the source of interference
is removed, the system will operate
normally.
Caravan/trailer towing equipment 3,
caravan/trailer towing
The system automatically detects if a
towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle.
Control indicator r When towing, plugging the trailer cable Automatic level control 3
Lights: into the socket automatically switches the The rear level of the vehicle is
Fault in system. The system is not park pilot off automatically adjusted to the load
functioning.Have the cause of the fault Fitting rear load racks 3 conditions while driving. Spring travel
eliminated by a workshop. The self- Rear load racks, such as a bike carrier, and ground clearance are increased,
diagnosis integrated into the system could cause system disturbance. which improves driving conditions.
facilitates rapid fault identification. The automatic level control system is
Pay attention to notes concerning
Astra TwinTop 3 58. activated after approx. 3 kilometres,
depending on the vehicle loading and
the nature of the road surface.
On function faults, do not utilise full load
capacity. Have the cause of the fault
eliminated immediately by a workshop.
Control indicator w
If control indicator w illuminates red while
driving, there is a loss of pressure. Stop
immediately and check tyre pressures. A
maximum speed of 80 km/h is permitted
for run-flat tyres 3. Pay attention to
relevant information 3 216.
If control indicator w illuminates yellow,
there is a fault in the system. Have the
cause of the fault eliminated by a
workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated
into the system facilitates rapid fault
identification.
Picture no: 17018t.tif The control indicator flashes three times Picture no: 17019t.tif
Deflation detection system when the system is initialising. System initialisation
(DDS = Deflation Detection System) 3 After correcting tyre pressure or changing
The deflation detection system 9 Warning a wheel, the system must be initialised:
continuously monitors the speed of all four With the ignition on, press the DDS button
tyres from speeds of about 30 km/h. If a The deflation detection system does not for approx. 4 seconds. Control indicator w
tyre loses pressure, its diameter reduces replace manual checks with a suitable flashes 3 times. The system is operational
and it rotates at a different speed than the gauge. after driving a certain distance.
other tyres. Control indicator w illuminates Check tyre pressures at least every Only initialise the system if all tyres have
red. 14 days and prior to any long journey; the prescribed pressure.
Stop immediately and check tyre pressure. the tyres should be checked when cold.
Mount the spare wheel if necessary 3 234, Dont forget to check the spare 3.
3 237.
Tyre pressure 3 213, 3 319.
Tyre pressure monitoring system 3

The tyre pressure monitoring system 9 Warning
continually checks the pressure and speed
of all four tyres when driving at speeds The tyre pressure monitoring system Board Computer
above about 30 km/h. does not replace manual checks with
a suitable gauge. BC 1
A pressure sensor is integrated in each Check tyre pressures at least every BC 2
wheel. Once a minute, the pressure of each 14 days and prior to any long journey;
tyre is sent to a control unit, where it is Timer
the tyres should be checked when cold.
compared. If the system detects one or Dont forget to check the spare 3. Tyres
more pressure differences, a message
appears on the information display. Tyre pressure 3 213, 3 319.
The current tyre pressures are displayed in
the Info display.
For the system to be operational, all wheels Display of current tyre pressure
must be equipped with pressure sensors Select menu item Tyres from the Board
and all tyres must be filled to the prescribed Computer menu.
pressure. The tyre pressure monitoring
system automatically detects if the vehicle is The current pressure of each tyre is
being driven with a load of up to 3 persons displayed.
or a full load. Warning messages
A message is given on the information
display to warn of inconsistent tyre
pressures. In some versions, the message
is displayed in abbreviated form.
For example, the following messages
can be displayed:
Navi active Navi active
Tyre pressure Attention!

check rear Front left tyre
left pressure loss
(value in bar) (value in bar)
OK OK

A graphic indicating the left rear tyre is A graphic indicating the front left tyre is Control indicator w
shown together with the current tyre shown together with the current tyre If control indicator w lights up yellow while
pressure: Slight pressure deviation, reduce pressure: Significant pressure deviation or driving, there is a fault in the tyre pressure
speed. Check pressure at next opportunity direct pressure loss! Steer out of flow of monitoring system. Fitting a wheel without
with appropriate gauge and correct if traffic as quickly as possible without pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel 3) will
necessary. endangering other drivers. Stop and check also generate a fault in the system. Have
On the colour information display this the tyres. the cause of the fault remedied by a
report will appear in yellow. Fit spare wheel 3 if necessary 3 234, 3 237. workshop. The integral self-diagnostic
If run-flat tyres 3 have been fitted, feature of the system allows faults to be
maximum permitted speed is 80 km/h, pay quickly remedied.
attention to notes 3 216.
On the colour information display this
report will appear in red.
Confirming warnings 3 125.
General information Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring

The tyre pressure monitoring system does system can be fitted on request by a
not function when the emergency wheel or workshop.
a spare wheel not fitted with a pressure When manually checking tyre pressure with
sensor is used, and the control indicator w a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto
lights yellow. The tyre pressure display the valve. Tyre pressure 3 319.
shows .. The tyre pressure is then
monitored by the deflation detection On each tyre change, the valve inserts and
system 3 206. sealing rings for the tyre pressure
monitoring system must be replaced by a
If a complete set of wheels without tyre workshop.
pressure control system sensors is mounted
(e.g. four winter tyres), no error message The use of commercially available liquid
will be displayed. The tyre pressure filled run-flat systems or repair kits can
Picture no: 17019t.tif monitoring system is not operational. The impair the function of the system. Opel-
System initialisation tyre pressure of a set of wheels without approved systems can be used.
After a tyre or wheel change, the system sensors is monitored by the deflation Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones,
must be initialised: With the ignition on, detection system 3 206. walkie-talkies) operated in the area could
press the DDS button for approx. cause interference in the tyre pressure
4 seconds. Control indicator w flashes monitoring system.
3 times. The system is operational after
driving a certain distance.
Only initialise the system if all tyres have
the prescribed pressure (check when tyres
are cold).
To ensure the full pedal travel can be

utilized, especially in case of a fault in one
of the brake circuits, there must be no mats
in the vicinity of the pedals 3 189.
When the engine is not running, the
support of the brake servo unit disappears
once the brake pedal has been depressed
once or twice. Braking effect is not
reduced, but braking requires significantly
greater force. This is especially important
to bear in mind when towing.
The brake fluid level should be checked
regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low
Picture no: 17206t.tif and the hand brake is not applied, control Picture no: 17208t.tif
Hydraulic brake system indicator R on the instrument panel Brake system control indicator R
The foot brake comprises two independent illuminates 3 110. The control indicator illuminates when the
brake circuits. ignition is switched on, if the handbrake is
applied or if the fluid level of the brake or
If one brake circuit fails, the vehicle can still clutch system is too low. Brake fluid level
be braked with the other brake circuit. 3 288.
However the braking effect will occur at a
lower pedal position and considerably 9 Warning
more force is required. The braking
distance is longer. Contact a workshop If the control indicator comes on when
before continuing to drive. the handbrake is released, stop driving
immediately. Contact a workshop for
assistance.
For vehicles with manual transmission

automated 3, the control indicator flashes
for a few seconds when the ignition is
turned off if the hand brake is not applied.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS u) Self-check

ABS prevents the wheels from locking. After the engine is started and the vehicle
starts off, there may be an audible system
It starts to regulate the braking pressure as self-check.
soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
The vehicle remains steerable. Fault
ABS control is made apparent though a 9 Warning
pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of
the regulation process. If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may
For optimum braking, keep the brake be subject to locking due to heavy
pedal fully depressed throughout the braking. The advantages of ABS are no
braking process, despite the fact that the longer operational. The vehicle can no
pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the longer be steered during full-on braking
pressure on the pedal. and may swerve.
Control indicator u for ABS Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a
It comes on for a few seconds after the workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated
ignition is turned on. The system is ready into the system facilitates rapid fault
for operation when the control indicator identification.
goes out.
If the control indicator does not go out
after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while
driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The
brake system remains operational without
ABS regulation.
Adaptive brake lamp 3
During full-on braking, all three brake
lamps flash for the duration of ABS control.
Brake assist Wheels, tyres

If the brake pedal is operated with a rapid, Suitable tyres and restrictions 3 319.
powerful push, the vehicle is automatically Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to
braked at full braking power in order to the chassis and provide optimum driving
achieve the shortest possible braking comfort and safety.
distance when full-on braking occurs
(brake assist). Changing tyre/wheel type
If tyres of a different size than those fitted
Maintain steady pressure on the brake at the factory are used, the electronic
pedal for as long as full-on braking is to speedometer may require reprogramming
continue. When the brake pedal is and other vehicle modifications may be
released, the maximum brake force necessary.
amplification is taken away.
Have the tyre pressure label replaced after
Picture no: 17207t.tif Hill Start Assist 3 (HSA) converting to a different tyre size.
Hand brake The system helps pull away on inclines.
Always apply handbrake firmly without After releasing the footbrake, if the hand 9 Warning
operating the release button, and apply as brake is not applied the brakes are only
released after 2 seconds. As soon as the Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may
firmly as possible on a downhill or uphill lead to accidents and render the vehicle
slope. acceleration is sufficient to prevent rolling
back, the brake is released. unroadworthy.
To release the hand brake pull the lever up
slightly, press the release button, and fully
lower the lever.
To reduce the operating forces of the hand
brake, depress the foot brake at the same
time.
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring Fitting new tyres

system 3 Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even
With winter tyres or after conversion to better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are
different wheel sizes, sensors for the tyre z the same size,
pressure monitoring system can be fitted z the same design,
by a workshop on request. Otherwise the
system would not show the tyre pressure z the same make,
deviations. z and have the same tread pattern.
Deflation detection system 3 3 206, Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the
tyre pressure monitoring system 3 3 207. direction of travel. The rolling direction is
Vehicles with run-flat tyres 3 indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on
When switching wheels, e.g. when the sidewall.
switching to winter tyres, use run-flat tyres Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction
as there is no spare wheel or tyre repair kit (e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be Picture no: 17211t.tif
in the vehicle. Tyre pressure
refitted as soon as possible. This is the only
Check tyre pressure at least every 14 days
Run-flat tyres 3 216. way to obtain full benefit from the design
and prior to any long journey; the tyres
properties of the tyre.
should be checked when cold. Dont forget
Run-flat tyres 3 must not be combined with to check the spare 3.
conventional tyres.
Remove the valve cap key from the tank
When disposing of tyres, follow the legal flap and use it to unscrew the valve caps.
requirements.
Always fill the spare wheel 3 to the

pressure specified for full load.
Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres
are warm. Otherwise the pressure may
drop below the permissible minimum when
the tyres cool down.
After having checked the tyre pressure,
tighten the valve caps using the valve cap
key.
Incorrect inflation pressures will impair
safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel
economy and will increase tyre wear.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 there is an adapter in the valve 9 Warning
cap key. Screw adapter to valve before If the pressure is too low, this can result
attaching tyre pressure gauge 3 207. in considerable tyre warm-up and
Tyre pressure 3 319 and on the label 3 internal damage, leading to tread
on the inside of the tank flap. separation and even to tyre blow-out
Tyre pressure data is for cold tyres. It at high speeds.
applies to both summer and winter tyres.

Tyre condition, wheel condition Tread depth If wear in the front is greater than that in
Drive over edges slowly and at a right Check tread depth regularly. the rear, move the rear wheels to the front
angle if possible. Driving over sharp edges For reasons of safety, tyres should be axle and vice versa.
can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel replaced when their tread depth has worn Correct the tyre pressure.
damage which is only noticed later on. down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).
Do not trap the tyres on the kerb when In vehicles with deflation detection
parking. The legally permissible minimum tread system 3 or tyre pressure monitoring
depth (1,6 mm) has been reached when system 3 initialise system 3 206, 3 209.
When parking, ensure that the tyres are not the tread has worn down as far as one of
pressed against the edge of the kerb. the wear indicators (TWI1)). A number of
Check the tyres regularly for damage. In wear indicators are spaced at equal
the event of damage or abnormal wear, intervals around the tyre within the tread.
seek the assistance of a workshop. Their position is indicated by markings on
the tyre sidewall.
1)
TWI = Tread Wear Indicator.
General information Tyre designations Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3

z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if Meanings: Run-flat tyres have reinforced, self-
the tyres are worn. e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H supporting sidewalls, which ensure that the
z Tyres age, even if they are used only very tyres always have a certain amount of
little or not at all. We recommend tyre 195 = Tyre width in mm driveability, even when there is no pressure.
replacement after no more than 6 years. 65 = Cross-section ratio Run-flat tyres are only permitted on
z Never fit used tyres the previous history
(tyre depth to width) in % vehicles with ESPPlus and tyre pressure
and use of which you do not know. R = Belt type Radial monitoring system or deflation detection
system.
RF = Type: RunFlat
15 = Wheel diameter in inch 9 Warning
91 = Load index
Even the tyre pressure of run-flat tyres
e.g. 91 corresponds to 618 kg
must be checked regularly.
H = Speed code letter: Check tyre pressures at least every
Speed code letters: 14 days and prior to any long journey;
the tyres should be checked when cold.
Q = up to 160 km/h
S = up to 180 km/h Depending on tyre manufacturer, run-flat
T = up to 190 km/h tyres can be identified from a marking on
H = up to 210 km/h the tyre wall. E.g. ROF = RunonFlat for
V = up to 240 km/h Goodyear or SSR = Self Supporting Runflat
W = up to 270 km/h Tyre for Continental.
Run-flat tyres may only be used in
combination with Opel-approved alloy
wheels; this also applies to winter tyres.
Driving with a damaged tyre Astra OPC "Nrburgring Edition" Winter tyres 3
A loss in tyre pressure is indicated by the with tyres 225/40 ZR 18 3 Notes on fitting new tyres 3 212.
tyre pressure monitoring system 3 or the This model is factory-fitted with high- Restrictions 3 216, 3 319.
deflation detection system 3. performance sports tyres, size
225/40 ZR 18. These tyres are approved Winter tyres increase driving safety at
If a tyre has no pressure, continued driving temperatures below 7 C.
is possible for use on public roads but have typical
racing characteristics and a The design of summer tyres means they
z at a speed of max. 80 km/h, correspondingly shallow tread. The tyres have limited qualities for winter driving.
z up to a distance of 80 km. provide sportily oriented and experienced
drivers with better performance at faster If prescribed by national regulations, affix
speeds on dry road surfaces but can cause the maximum vehicle speed label 3 within
9 Warning the drivers field of vision.
the vehicle to break away without warning
When driving with a flat tyre, do not if this limit is exceeded. Avoid adopting a If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted
exceed a speed of 80 km/h or a distance risky driving style because of this improved with a summer tyre, the vehicles driveability
of 80 km. performance. In wet conditions adapt your may be affected, especially on slippery road
The vehicle will be more difficult to steer driving style and speed to the shallow surfaces. Obtain a replacement for the
and handle and the braking distance tread. Risk of aquaplaning 3 216. Safety faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the
will be longer. on the roads can only be achieved by wheel balanced and fitted to the vehicle.
Adapt driving style and speed to the driving responsibly.
conditions at hand.
Do not use a tyre repair kit.

Deflation detection system 3 3 206, tyre
pressure monitoring system 3 3 207.
Wheel covers 3 Remove the wheel trims when using tyre

Use of wheel trims and tyres that approved chains 3 237.
by Opel for the vehicle in question and Tyre chains may only be used at speeds up
thereby fulfil all requirements for the wheel to 50 km/h. Only use for brief periods on
and tyre combination. roads that are free of snow.
If the wheel trims and tyres used are not
Opel-approved, the tyres must not have a 9 Warning
beaded edge.
Damage may lead to tyre blow-out.
Wheel trims must not impair brake cooling.
Remove the wheel trims when fitting tyre Tyre chains must not be used on the
chains 3. temporary spare wheel. If you need to use
tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre,
9 Warning fit the temporary spare on the rear axle
Picture no: 17217t.tif and transfer one of the rear wheels to the
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims Tyre chains 3 front axle.
could lead to sudden loss of air and Restrictions and additional notes 3 319.
thereby accidents. Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive
wheels (front axle). They must be fitted to
the tyres symmetrically in order to achieve
a concentric fit.
Use fine mesh chains that add no more
than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the
inboard sides (including chain lock).
Roof racks 3
For safety reasons, and to prevent roof
damage, we recommend use of the Opel
roof rack system approved for your vehicle.
Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra
TwinTop.
Follow the usage instructions for the roof
rack.
Remove the roof rack when not in use.
Driving hints 3 188.

Fitting on model without roof rail Fitting on model with roof rail 3
Lift the covers from the fitting openings. To attach the roof rack, insert mounting
Attach roof rack at appropriate points, see bolts in the bores shown in the picture, see
enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions provided with the roof rack
instructions. system.
Towing equipment 3
Only use towing equipment that has been
approved for your vehicle. Entrust
retrofitting of towing equipment to a
workshop. It may be necessary to make
changes that affect the cooling system,
heat shields or other equipment.
Do not mount towing equipment to
vehicles with Z 20 LEH engine.
Installation dimensions of trailer towing
equipment 3 332, 3 333, 3 334.

Towing equipment with Fitting the coupling ball bar
removable coupling ball bar 3 Fold down the socket. Remove the sealing
plug from the hole for the coupling ball bar
Caution and stow it in the luggage compartment.
The coupling ball bar is to be removed
when not towing.
Stowage of coupling ball bar
In Saloons, the coupling ball bar is
in a pouch, fastened in the luggage
compartment cargo box with a strap 3 223.
In Estates, the coupling ball bar is fastened
with a strap in a compartment in the spare
wheel well of the luggage compartment.

Checking the tensioning of the coupling Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be Inserting the coupling ball bar
ball bar tensioned before it is inserted into the Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar in the
z Red marking on rotary knob must point coupling housing: coupling housing and push firmly upwards
towards white marking on coupling ball z Connect coupling ball bar with key in until it audibly engages.
bar. position 1; see fig. 17222 T. The turn knob snaps back into its home
z The gap between the rotary knob and z Pull out the rotary knob and turn position resting against the coupling ball
the coupling ball bar must be approx. clockwise as far as it will go; see figure. bar.
4 millimetres
z The key must be at position 1 in the lock. 9 Warning
Do not touch rotary handle during

insertion.
Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly

installed
z Green marking on rotary knob must
point towards white marking on coupling
ball bar.
z There must be no gap between the
rotary handle and the coupling ball bar
z The coupling ball bar must be firmly
engaged in the opening
z The coupling ball bar must be locked
and the key removed
Picture no: 17225t.tif 9 Warning Picture no: 17227t.tif

Lock the coupling ball bar in position Towing a caravan/trailer is only Eye for break-away stopping cable
by turning key to position 2 3 221, permitted with a correctly mounted In the case of trailers/caravans with brakes,
Fig. 17222 T. Remove the key and press towbar. If the towbar cannot be attach breakaway stopping cable to eye.
the protective flap into place. correctly mounted, contact a workshop
When the coupling ball bar is locked the for assistance.
turn knob can no longer be pulled out.
Caravan/trailer towing
Caravan and trailer loads1)
The permissible caravan/trailer loads are
vehicle and engine-dependent maximum
values which must not be exceeded. The
actual caravan/trailer load is the difference
between the actual gross weight of the
caravan/trailer and the actual coupling
socket load with the caravan/trailer
coupled.
The permissible caravan/trailer loads
are specified in the vehicle documents.
In general, they are valid for gradients
Picture no: 17226t.tif Picture no: 17220t.tif up to maximum 12 %.
Dismounting the coupling ball bar Stowage of coupling ball bar
Open the protective flap, turn the key to Saloon
position 1 to unlock the coupling ball bar; Stow the coupling ball bar in the pouch
3 221 see Fig. 17222 T. and fasten it in the luggage compartment
Pull out rotary handle, twist it clockwise as cargo box with the strap.
far as it will go, pull the coupling ball bar Estate
down and store it in stowage compartment Stow the coupling ball bar in the
in the luggage compartment 3 220. compartment in the spare wheel well of
Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the the luggage compartment, fastening it
coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket with the strap.
3 220, Fig. 17221 T.
1)
Observe national regulations.
The permitted caravan/trailer load applies Coupling socket load Rear axle load during towing
up to the specified incline and up to an The coupling socket load is the load With a trailer coupled and the towing
altitude of 1000 metres above sea level. exerted by the trailer/caravan on the vehicle fully loaded (including all
Since engine power decreases as altitude coupling ball. It can be varied by changing occupants), the permissible rear axle
increases because of the air becoming the weight distribution when loading the load (see identification plate or vehicle
thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, trailer/caravan. documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg
the permitted towing weight also The maximum permissible coupling socket and the permissible gross vehicle weight
decreases by 10 % for every 1000 metres load (75 kg) is specified on the towing by 45 kg for the Saloon. For the Estate,
of additional altitude. The towing weight equipment identification plate and in the the permissible rear axle load may be
does not have to be reduced when driving vehicle documents. Always aim for the exceeded by 60 kg and the permissible
on roads with slight inclines (less than 8 %, maximum load, especially in the case of gross vehicle weight by 30 kg. If the
e. g. motorways). heavy caravans/trailers. The coupling permissible rear axle load is exceeded
The permissible gross train weight must socket load should never fall below 25 kg. a maximum speed of 100 km/h applies
not be exceeded. This weight is specified (80 km/h if approved for use as a
When measuring the coupling socket load, commercial vehicle).
on the identification plate 3 292. make sure that the drawbar of the loaded
trailer/caravan is at the same height as it
will be when the trailer/caravan is coupled
with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly
important for trailers/caravans with
tandem axle.
Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA) Ultrasonic parking sensors 3 are When driving downhill, drive in the same
TSA monitors vehicle movements when de-activated when towing. gear as if driving uphill and drive at a
towing a caravan or trailer. If the system Handling is greatly influenced by the similar speed.
detects lurching movements, engine power loading of the trailer/caravan. Loads Adjust tyre pressure to the value specified
is reduced and the vehicle/trailer should therefore be secured so that they for full load 3 319.
combination is selectively braked until the cannot slip and be placed in the centre of
lurching ceases. Starting on inclines
the trailer/caravan if possible, i.e. above For vehicles with manual transmission, the
TSA is a function of the electronic stability the axle. most favourable engine speed when
programme (ESPPlus) 3 199. In the case of trailers with low driving starting off on an incline is between
Driving characteristics, towing tips stability or caravans with a permitted 2500 and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and
Before attaching the trailer/caravan, gross vehicle weight of over 1300 kg between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel
lubricate the ball of the trailer/caravan (Saloon)/1200 kg (Estate), do not exceed engines. Hold engine speed constant,
towing device. However, do not lubricate a speed of 80 km/h; the use of a friction- engage clutch gradually (let slip), release
the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the type stabiliser is highly recommended. hand brake and open throttle. If possible,
coupling ball, is being used to damp If the trailer/caravan starts to sway, drive the engine speed should not drop during
hunting. more slowly, do not attempt to correct the this procedure.
Check caravan/trailer lighting before steering and brake sharply if necessary. In vehicles with automatic transmission 3
starting to drive. The fog tail lamps on If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully, and manual transmission automated 3,
the vehicle are deactivated when towing depress the brake pedal as hard as it is sufficient to apply full throttle in D or 3
a caravan or trailer. possible. in automatic mode.
Trailers with LED turn signals must have Remember that the braking distance for Before starting off under extreme
a provision enables lamp monitoring for vehicles towing caravans/trailers with and operating conditions, switch off
commercial bulbs. without brake is always greater than that unnecessary consumers.
for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer.
226 Self-help, vehicle care
Self-help, vehicle care Diesel fuel system, bleeding

The diesel fuel system must be bled if the
tank was run dry. Turn on the ignition three
times for 15 seconds each time. Then start
Diesel fuel system, bleeding ............... 226 the engine for a maximum of 40 seconds1).
Bonnet .................................................. 226 Wait at least 5 seconds before repeating
Starting the engine with jump leads 3 227 the process. If the engine still does not
Towing .................................................. 229 start, seek the assistance of a workshop.
Warning triangle 3......................... 232
First-aid kit (cushion) + 3................... 232
Spare wheel 3...................................... 234
Jack 3 and vehicle tools 3 ............ 236
Changing wheels ................................. 237
Tyre repair kit 3 ................................... 240 Picture no: 17053t.tif
Electrical system .................................. 244 Bonnet
Fuses and the most important circuits Pull the release lever on the drivers side
they protect ....................................... 246 below the instrument panel. Then return
Bulb replacement ................................ 253 the lever to its original position.
Halogen headlamp system ................ 253
Xenon headlamp system 3,
Adaptive Forward Lighting
system 3 ............................................ 257
Front indicator lamps .......................... 259
Side turn signal lamps......................... 260
Fog lamps 3......................................... 260
Tail lamps............................................. 260
Number plate lamp ............................. 269
Courtesy lamps .................................... 270
Vehicle care.......................................... 271
1)
Only possible for 30 seconds with engines
A 17 DTJ, A 17 DTR, Z 17 DTH, Z17 DTJ
and Z 17 DTR for technical reasons.
Self-help, vehicle care 227
The bonnet is held open automatically 3. Starting the engine with jump
If the bonnet is of a different version, leads 3
engage the support. Do not start with a quick charger or by
Push the support firmly into holder before pushing or towing.
closing the bonnet. Lower the bonnet and A vehicle with a discharged battery can be
allow to fall into lock. Check to ensure it started using jump leads and the battery of
engages properly. another vehicle.
9 Warning
Be extremely careful when starting with

jump leads. Any deviation from the
following instructions can lead to injuries
Picture no: 17054t.tif or damage caused by battery explosion
Lift the safety catch upwards and open the or damage to the electrical systems of
bonnet. both vehicles.
Dirt or snow on the bonnet can slide onto
the windscreen when opened and block the
air intake. Air intake 3 169.
z Use a booster battery with the same

voltage (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must
not be considerably lower than that of
the discharged battery.
z Use jump leads with insulated terminals
and a cross section of at least 16 mm2
(25 mm2 for diesel engines).
z Do not disconnect the discharged
battery from the vehicle.
z Switch off all unnecessary electrical
consumers.
z Do not lean over the battery during jump
Picture no: 17229t.tif starting. Picture no: 17230t.tif
z Never expose the battery to naked Lead connection sequence:
z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to
flames or sparks. 1. Connect the red lead to the positive
touch those of the other lead.
z A discharged battery can freeze as soon terminal 1 of the booster battery.
z The vehicles must not come into contact
as temperatures reach 0 C. Defrost a 2. Connect the other end of the red lead to
with each other during the jump starting
frozen battery before connecting jump the positive terminal 2 of the discharged
process.
leads. battery.
z Apply the hand brake. Manual
z Do not allow battery fluid to come into 3. Connect the black lead to the negative
transmission or manual transmission
contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or terminal 3 of the booster battery.
automated 3 in neutral; automatic
painted surfaces. The fluid contains
transmission 3 in P. 4. Connect the other end of the black
sulphuric acid which can cause injuries
and damage in the event of direct lead 4 to a grounding point on the
contact. vehicle, such as the engine block or screw
connection in the engine suspension. It
z Wear eye protection and protective should be connected at a point as far as
clothing when handling a battery. possible from the discharged battery.
Route the leads so that they cannot catch

on rotating parts in the engine
compartment.
Starting the engine:
1. Start the engine of the vehicle providing
the jump start.
2. After 5 minutes, start the other engine.
Start attempts should be made at
intervals of 1 minute not last longer
than 15 seconds.
3. Allow both engines to idle for 3 minutes
with the leads connected.
4. Activate an electrical load (e.g. lights, Picture no: 17231t.tif Picture no: 17232t.tif
heated rear window) in the vehicle Towing Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as
Towing of vehicle far as it will go until it stops in a horizontal
receiving the jump start.
Disengage the cover at the bottom and position.
5. Reverse above sequence exactly when pull off downwards. Attach a tow rope 3 or better still a tow
removing leads.
For versions with tyre repair set 3, the rod 3 to the eye.
towing eye is in the stowage compartment The towing eye must only be used for
in the boot below the loading floor cover towing, not for recovering the vehicle.
3 240.
Switch on ignition to release steering
In the version with a spare wheel 3 the column lock and to permit operation of
towing eye is in the stowage compartment brake lamps, horn and windscreen wipers.
for the jack 3 and the vehicle tools 3
beneath the spare wheel 3 236.
Vehicles with automatic transmission 3

9 Warning should be towed facing forward only and
must not be towed faster than 80 km/h or
Vehicles with the Open&Start system 3 further than 100 km. If the transmission is
must not be towed when the battery is defective, or if the above speed or distance
discharged because the steering column is to be exceeded, the front axle must be
lock cannot be released. Towing is only raised off the ground.
possible with the ignition switched on.
Use jump leads to start the engine if On vehicles with manual transmission
necessary. automated 3, if the automatic clutch
has been released manually after an
Manual transmission or manual interruption to the power supply, towing is
transmission automated 3 in neutral; not possible 3 176. If this occurs, contact a
automatic transmission 3 in N. workshop immediately for assistance.
Caution After towing, unscrew the towing eye Picture no: 17233t.tif
clockwise. Refit the cover and press it into Towing another vehicle
Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. place. Disengage the cover at the bottom and
Excessive tractive force can damage the pull off downwards.
vehicle.
When the engine is not running,

considerably more force is needed to brake
and steer.
To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes from
the towing vehicle, switch on the air
recirculation 3 and close the windows.
Contact a workshop for assistance.
After towing, unscrew the towing eye

clockwise and refit the cover.
Version with cover 3: install by inserting the
bottom lugs of the cover 3 in the bumper,
folding and then press the lugs at the top
into place.

For other models 3 unclip locking tabs Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far
downward and pull off the cover upwards. as it will go until it stops in a horizontal
For versions with tyre repair set 3, the position.
towing eye is in the stowage compartment Attach a tow rope 3 or better still a tow
in the boot below the loading floor cover rod 3 to the eye.
3 240. The towing eye must only be used for
In the version with a spare wheel 3 the towing, not for recovering the vehicle.
towing eye is in the stowage compartment
for the jack 3 and the vehicle tools 3 Caution
beneath the spare wheel 3 236.
Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.
Excessive tractive force can damage
the vehicle.

Warning triangle 3 Estate, Delivery Van First-aid kit (cushion) + 3
Saloon, Astra TwinTop Insert the warning triangle in the retaining Saloon
Store warning triangle in rear luggage straps of the tailgate inner panelling. Secure the first-aid kit to the right luggage
compartment wall: first fit warning triangle compartment wall using the retaining
into recess on left and the insert in guide on strap.
right.
To remove the warning triangle, lift to the
right and pull out to the right.
For vehicles with cargo box 3: Lift the
warning triangle with the right half of the
cargo box. Pull out the warning triangle to
the right.

Estate Delivery Van Astra TwinTop
Fasten the first-aid kit (cushion) to the left Place first aid kit in stowage compartment Store the first-aid kit (cushion) in the recess
luggage compartment wall with a behind drivers seat. To open the cover, behind the strap in the left luggage
retaining strap. press the locking tab. compartment wall.
Spare wheel 3 Stowing wheels with wide tyres in the

Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre spare wheel well
repair kit instead of a spare wheel 3 240. The spare wheel well is not designed for all
permitted tyre sizes. If a wheel wider than
the spare must be stowed in the spare
wheel well after changing wheels, the floor
cover can be placed on the projecting
wheel.
This must be taken into consideration when
the luggage compartment is being loaded,
particularly with the Astra TwinTop 3 60.

Spare wheel placed in luggage
compartment
The spare wheel is in the luggage
compartment beneath the floor covering.
It is secured in the recess with a wing nut.
The estate also has a spacer above the
securing nut.
General information Notes on temporary spare wheel 3

Depending on the version, the spare wheel z Using a temporary spare wheel may
may be in the form of a temporary spare change the driving behaviour of the
wheel 3. Refer to the notes on this page vehicle, particularly if using winter
and pages 212, 319. tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly
On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare as possible, balance wheel and fit to
wheel may have a steel rim. vehicle.
Use of the spare wheel or winter tyres can z Fit only one temporary spare wheel.
change vehicle handling. Have a defective z Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.
tyre replaced as soon as possible. z Take curves slowly.
If the mounted spare wheel is smaller than z Do not use the temporary spare wheel
the other wheels, vehicle handling may for a lengthy period.
Picture no: 17240t.tif change. In many countries, it is only
permitted as an emergency spare wheel. z Replace temporary spare wheel with full
Estate
Have a defective tyre replaced as soon as specification wheel without delay.
Take adapter 3 and hooks 3 from the
rails 3 in the luggage compartment walls. possible. z Tyre chains are not permitted on the
Raise the rear lashing eyes and lift the floor temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains are
cover to the vertical position so that it rests necessary after a front wheel puncture,
on the roof lining. fit the temporary spare wheel to the rear
and a rear wheel to the front. Check tyre
When closing, guide the lashing eyes
pressure and adjust if necessary 3 319.
through the slots in the floor cover.
z Pay attention to notes concerning the
Vehicles with cargo box 3: removal 3 80.
temporary spare wheel 212, 3 319.
Astra TwinTop
Accessing the spare wheel when the roof is
open: Engage luggage compartment cover
on the rear window frame and activate the
loading aid 3 81. Raise the floor cover in
the luggage compartment.
Notes on directional tyres 3

Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the
direction of travel. The rolling direction is
indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on
the sidewall.
The following applies when tyres are fitted
opposing the rolling direction:
z Vehicle handling may change. Have a
defective tyre replaced as soon as
possible.
z Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.
z Be especially careful when driving in rain
and snow. Picture no: 17241t.tif Picture no: 17242t.tif
Additional notes on directional tyres 3 212. Jack 3 and vehicle tools 3 Vehicles with spare wheel 3
The jack and the vehicle tools have been The jack and tool kit are in a stowage
specially developed for your vehicle and compartment in the boot below the spare
must only be used on that vehicle. Only use wheel. Remove spare wheel 3 234.
jack for changing wheels. After use, stow away the jack and tools in
Vehicles with tyre repair set 3 the compartment as shown in illustration.
The tool kit and tyre repair set are in a Astra TwinTop
storage compartment below the floor The tools for emergency operation of
cover in the luggage compartment. the convertible hardtop are stowed in
the glove compartment.
Changing wheels z Never change more than one wheel at

There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a once.
spare wheel 3 240. z Use the jack only to change wheels.
Make the following preparations and z If the ground on which the vehicle is
observe the following information: standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm
z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and non- thick) should be placed under the jack 3.
skid surface. Set the front wheels to the z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
straight-ahead position. wheel to be changed by placing wedge
z Switch on hazard warning lamps, apply blocks or equivalent in front and behind
hand brake, automatic transmission 3 - the wheel.
selector lever in P; manual transmission z No people or animals may be in the
or manual transmission automated 3 - vehicle when it is jacked up.
engage 1st or reverse gear. Picture no: 17243t.tif
z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle.
z Put up warning triangle 3 in accordance 1. Pull off the wheel trim using the hook 3.
z Never start the vehicle while it is on the Vehicle tools 3 236.
with regulations. Warning triangle 3 232.
jack.
z Remove spare wheel from luggage For wheel trims with visible wheel bolts 3:
z Before inserting the wheel bolts, wipe The trim can remain on the wheel. Do not
compartment 3 234.
them clean and apply a light coat of remove the retaining washers 3 on the
z On the Astra TwinTop, the roof must be commercially available grease to the wheel bolts.
closed before the vehicle is raised. taper of each bolt.

Alloy wheels 3: Disengage the wheel bolt 2. Push on the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far 3. The location of each jacking point is
caps with a screwdriver and remove. as possible and loosen the wheel bolts marked.
Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth half a turn.
between the screwdriver and ally wheel.

4. Before positioning the jack 3, set it to the Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and 6. Change wheel. Notes on spare
necessary height. Position the jack 3 at turn crank to raise vehicle. wheel 3 234, notes on temporary
the front or rear so that the jack claw If this is not the case, carefully lower the spare wheel 3 235.
spans the vertical base and grips in the vehicle immediately and reposition the 7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly,
recess in the vertical base. Make sure it is jack. inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far
properly positioned. as possible.
5. Unscrew the wheel bolts.
The jack base must be on the ground 8. Lower vehicle.
directly below the jacking point in a If the wheel bolts have retaining
manner that prevents it from slipping. washers 3, they must not be removed. 9. Push on the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far
as possible and tighten the bolts
crosswise. Tightening torque is 110 Nm.
10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clean the Tyre repair kit 3
wheel around the retaining clips. Valve Minor damage to the tyre tread or sidewall
symbol 3 on back of wheel trim must can be repaired with the tyre repair kit.
point towards valve on wheel.
Do not remove the foreign body from the
Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt tyre.
caps 3.
Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that is on
Alloy wheels 3: Align and refit wheel the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre
bolt caps 3. repair kit.
11. Stow the defective tyre, vehicle tools
and warning triangle 3 in the luggage 9 Warning
compartment 3 232 to 3 236.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h.
12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly Do not use the temporary spare wheel
fitted wheel. for a lengthy period. Picture no: 17250t.tif
The tyre repair kit is in a compartment
13. Check that the wheel bolts are at their Steering and handling may be affected. under the floor cover luggage
tightening torque of 110 Nm.
compartment.
14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel Important notes 3 243.
1. Take the pouch with the tyre repair kit
that was removed. In the event of a flat tyre:
from the compartment. Carefully remove
15. Initialise deflation detection system 3 z Switch on the hazard warning lamps,
the components from the pouch.
or tyre pressure monitoring system 3 apply the hand brake, automatic
transmission 3 - selector lever in P; 2. Remove the compressor.
3 206, 3 209.
manual transmission or manual
transmission automated 3 - engage 1st
or reverse gear.
z Put up warning triangle 3 in accordance
with regulations. Warning triangle 3 232.

3. Remove the electrical connection 4. Screw the compressor air hose to the 7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve.
cable and air hose from the stowage connection on the sealant bottle. 8. The switch on the compressor must be
compartments on the underside of the 5. Fit the sealant bottle into the retainer on set to .
compressor. the compressor. 9. Connect the compressor plug to the
Set the compressor near the tyre in such accessory socket or cigarette lighter
a way that the sealant bottle is upright. socket. Accessory socket 3 104.
6. Remove the valve cap from the defective To avoid discharging the battery, we
tyre. recommend running the engine.
Drain excess tyre pressure with the

button over the pressure indicator.
Do not operate compressor for longer
than 10 minutes, see "Important notes"
3 243.
14. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the
filler hose to the free connection on the
sealant bottle. This prevents sealant
leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the
luggage compartment.
15. Wipe away any sealant spill with a
cloth.
Picture no: 17254t.tif Picture no: 17255t.tif 16. Collapse warning triangle 3 and store
10. Set the rocker switch on the compressor If the specified tyre pressure is not in luggage compartment 3 232.
to I. The tyre is filled with sealant. reached within 10 minutes, remove the
17. Apply the enclosed sticker indicating
11. While the sealant bottle drains tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle through
maximum permitted speed in the
(approx. 30 seconds) the pressure one tyre rotation. Reconnect the tyre
drivers field of view.
indicator on the compressor briefly repair kit and continue the filling
process for 10 minutes. If the specified 18. Continue driving immediately to
points to 6 bar. Pressure then sinks
tyre pressure is still not reached, the allow the sealant to distribute evenly
again.
tyre is too badly damaged. Contact throughout the tyre. Stop after approx.
12. All of the sealant is pumped into a workshop. 10 km (no more than 10 minutes)
the tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is and check tyre pressure. Screw the
filled with air. compressor air hose directly onto
13. The prescribed tyre pressure 3 319 the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T).
should be reached within 10 minutes,
Shut off compressor when pressure is
reached.
Important The sealant can only be stored for approx.

The driving comfort of the repaired tyre is 4 years. After this time, the sealing
severely affected, therefore have this tyre properties can no longer be guaranteed.
replaced. Heed the expiration date on the sealant
bottle.
If the compressor makes abnormal noises
or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least Replace the used sealant bottle. Dispose of
30 minutes. the bottle as prescribed by applicable
laws.
The integrated safety valve opens at a
pressure of 7 bar. The compressor and sealant can be used
from approx. -30 C.
Protect the compressor from moisture and
rain. The adapters on the underside of the
compressor can be used to pump up other
Picture no: 17256t.tif objects, such as balls, airbeds and
If tyre pressure is more than 1.3 bar, inflatable dinghies. To remove, unscrew
adjust to the prescribed value. Repeat the air hose from the compressor and pull
the procedure until there is no more out the adapter.
pressure loss.
If the tyre pressure has fallen below
1.3 bar, the vehicle may no longer be
used. Contact a workshop.
19. Stow tyre repair kit in luggage
compartment 3 240.

Electrical system A blown fuse can be identified by its melted Do not replace the fuse until the cause of
Fuses wire. the fault has been remedied.
A replacement fuse must have the same
marking (rating) as the blown fuse.
The vehicle has two fuse boxes: one behind
a cover on the left side of the luggage
compartment and one in the front left of
the engine compartment.
Put spare fuses in the location provided in
the fuse box in the luggage compartment.
Open cover 3 246.
Before replacing a fuse, turn off the
respective switch and the ignition.
Picture no: 17258t.tif Picture no: 18449t.tif Picture no:

There is a fuse extractor in the luggage Place the fuse extractor on the various Only fit fuses of the specified current
compartment fuse box to facilitate types of fuse from the top or side, and rating. The current rating of each fuse is
replacement of fuses - see figure above for withdraw fuse. marked on it in writing and is indicated by
an example. a colour code. It is also indicated at the
fuse location in the fuse box.
Different versions of fuses are used.
Fuses and the most important

circuits they protect
Fuse box in luggage compartment
Depending on the equipment version,
there are two different fuse boxes in the
luggage compartment for differing
electrical circuits:
z Version A see Fig. 18504 T,
z Version B see Fig. 17958 T.
The Astra TwinTop always has version B.
Spare fuses, fuse extractor 3 244.
The fuse box is located on the left side of
the luggage compartment behind a cover. Picture no: 17261t.tif Picture no: 18022t.tif
5-door saloon, Estate, Delivery Van Astra TwinTop
Do not store any objects behind the cover.
To open, turn both catches with a coin To open, pull the two knobs, remove
and fold cover down. the clips and fold the cover upwards.
3-door saloon
To open, fold the cover upwards.
Fuse box, version B No. Circuit

Some functions are protected by several
fuses. 13 Ultrasonic parking sensors
14 Heating, air conditioning system
No. Circuit
15
1 Electric windows, front
16 Seat occupancy recognition,
2
Open&Start system
3 Instruments
17 Rain sensor, air quality sensor,
4 Heating, air conditioning system, tyre pressure monitoring system,
climate control system interior mirror
5 Airbags 18 Instruments, switches
6 19
Picture no: 18504t.tif 7 20 CDC
Fuse box, version A
8 21 Heated exterior mirrors
fuses. To replace a fuse, pull off its 9 22 Sun roof
protective cap. 10 23 Electric windows, rear
No. Circuit 11 Heated rear window
1 Fog lamps 12 Rear screen wiper
2
3 Luggage compartment socket
4 Reverse lamps
5 Electric windows, rear
6 Air conditioning system
7 Electric windows, front
8 Heated exterior mirrors
No. Circuit
38 Central locking system, terminal 30
39 Seat heater (left)
40 Seat heater (right)
41
42
43
44

No. Circuit No. Circuit
24 Diagnostics plug 32
25 33 Open&Start system
26 Electrically retractable exterior 34 Sun roof, TwinTop
mirrors 35 Rear socket
27 Ultrasonic sensor, anti-theft alarm 36 Towing equipment
system
37
28
29 Cigarette lighter, front socket
30 Rear socket
31
Depending on the equipment version, Fuse layout, version A

there are two different fuse layouts for the Some functions are protected by several
engine compartment fuse box, handling fuses.
different electrical circuits:
No. Circuit
z If the luggage compartment fuse box is
version A - see Fig. 18504 T 3 247 - the 1 ABS
fuse layout in the engine compartment is 2 ABS
version A - see next column.
3 Interior fan climate control system
z If the luggage compartment fuse box is 4 Interior fan, heating,
version B - see Fig. 17958 T 3 248 - the air conditioning system
fuse layout in the engine compartment is
version B - see next page. 5 Radiator fan 1
The Astra TwinTop always has version B.
Fuse box in engine compartment Spare fuses, fuse extractor 3 244.
The fuse box is at the front left side of the
engine compartment.
To open the cover, release the catch by
inserting a screwdriver into the opening as
far as it will go and swivelling it to the side.
Open the cover upwards and remove.
No. Circuit
21 Engine electronics
23 Headlamp range adjustment
24 Fuel pump
25
27 Heating, air conditioning system,
air quality sensor
28
Picture no: 17264t.tif Picture no: 29 Power steering
No. Circuit No. Circuit 30 Engine electronics
6 Radiator fan 2 14 Windscreen wipers 31 Rear screen wiper
7 Central locking system 15 Windscreen wipers 32 Brake lamp switch
8 Windscreen washer system, 16 Horn, ABS, brake lamp switch, 33 Headlamp range adjustment, light
tailgate air conditioning system switch, clutch switch, instrument
9 Heated rear window, heated 17 Diesel filter or air conditioning assembly, drivers door module
exterior mirrors system 34 Control unit, steering column
10 Diagnostics plug 18 Starter module
11 Instruments 19 35 Infotainment system
12 Mobile telephone, digital radio, 20 Horn 36 Cigarette lighter, front socket
Twin Audio, display
13 Courtesy lamp
Fuse layout, version B No. Circuit No. Circuit

fuses. 7 Windscreen washer system 16 Electronics control units,
8 Horn Open&Start system, ABS,
No. Circuit brake lamp switch, TwinTop
9 Headlamp washer system
1 ABS 17 Diesel filter heating
10
2 ABS 18 Starter
11
3 Interior fan climate control system 19 Transmission electronics
12
4 Interior fan, heating, air 20 Air conditioning system
conditioning system 13 Fog lamps
5 Radiator fan 1 14 Windscreen wipers
6 Radiator fan 2 15 Windscreen wipers
23 Adaptive Forward Lighting,
headlamp range adjustment

No. Circuit No. Circuit
24 Fuel pump 31 Adaptive Forward Lighting,
25 Transmission electronics headlamp range adjustment
26 Engine electronics 32 Brake system, air conditioning
system, clutch switch
27 Power steering
33 Adaptive Forward Lighting,
28 Transmission electronics headlamp range adjustment,
29 Transmission electronics light switch
30 Engine electronics 34 Control unit, steering column
module
35 Infotainment system
36 Mobile telephone, digital radio,
Twin Audio, display
Bulb replacement
Switch off the ignition. Switch off the
relevant switch or close the doors.
Only hold a new bulb at the base! Do not
touch the bulb glass with bare hands.
The replacement bulb must match the
data on the base of the defective bulb.

The bulbs of the front outer lamps are Halogen headlamp system
replaced through openings in the front Headlamps have separate systems for
wheel arches: turn relevant wheels to gain main beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped
access, release catch and remove cover. beam 2 (outer bulbs).
To replace the bulbs from the right side of
the engine compartment, detach the air
hose of the air filter. On the left side,
unplug the fuse box connector plug.

Dipped beam 3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage. 4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from
1. Replace bulbs through the openings in the reflector.
the wheel arches 3 253.
2. Remove headlamp protective cover.

5. Detach bulb from bulb holder. Main beam 5. Disengage spring clip from retainer by
6. Insert a new bulb in the bulb holder. 1. Open bonnet and engage support. pressing forward and then swing
downward.
7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on 2. Replace bulbs from engine
the bulb holder engage in the recesses compartment out 3 253. 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.
in the reflector. 3. Remove headlamp protective cover. 7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the
8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as it lugs in the recesses on the reflector.
4. Detach plug connector from bulb.
will go. 8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector
9. Place headlamp protective cover in onto bulb.
position and close. 9. Place headlamp protective cover in
position and close.

Parking lamps 4. Remove parking lamp socket from 5. Remove bulb from socket.
1. Open bonnet and engage support. reflector. 6. Insert a new bulb.
2. Replace bulbs from engine compartment 7. Insert holder in reflector. Place
out 3 253. headlamp protective cap in position
3. Remove main beam headlamp and close.
protective cover.

Xenon headlamp system 3, Main beam 3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage.
Adaptive Forward Lighting 1. Replace bulbs through the openings in
system 3 the wheel arches 3 253.
Headlamps have separate systems for 2. Remove headlamp protective cover.
dipped beam 1 (inner bulbs) and main
beam 2 (outer bulbs).
Dipped beam
9 Warning
Dipped beam works with a very high

electrical voltage. Do not touch, risk of
injury. Have a workshop replace the
bulb.

4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from 5. Detach bulb from bulb holder. Parking lamps
the reflector. 6. Insert a new bulb in the bulb holder. 1. Open bonnet and engage support.
7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on 2. Replace bulbs through the openings
the bulb holder engage in the recesses in the wheel arches 3 253.
in the reflector. 3. Remove main beam headlamp
8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as it protective cover.
will go.
9. Place headlamp protective cover in
position and close.

4. Remove parking lamp socket from 5. Remove bulb from socket. Front indicator lamps
reflector. 6. Insert a new bulb. 1. Open bonnet and engage support.
7. Insert holder in reflector. 2. Replace bulbs through the openings
Place headlamp protective cap in the wheel arches 3 253.
in position and close. 3. Rotate bulb holder to left and
disengage.

4. Push bulb into socket slightly, rotate left Tail lamps 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder.
and remove. Saloon 5-door 3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen
5. Insert a new bulb. 1. To replace bulbs on the right side, use a fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3
coin to open the lock as indicated in the and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt
6. Insert lamp holder in reflector, rotate
Fig. and fold the cover down. wrench 3, see vehicle tools 3 236.
clockwise and engage in position.
To replace bulbs on the left side, use a
Side turn signal lamps coin to turn both locks as illustrated on
Have the bulb changed by a workshop. page 246 in Fig. 17261 T and fold the
cover down.
Fog lamps 3
Have the bulb changed by a workshop.

4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear. 5. Unscrew the three screws using a Bulbs in bulb carrier:
screwdriver. Vehicle tools 3 236. Press 1 = Reversing light
the locking tabs on the outside of the
bulb holder inwards and remove the 2 = Flasher
bulb holder. 3 = Reversing light/brake light
4 = Reversing light
5 = Fog tail lamp (only on one side
in certain countries)
6. Remove bulb from socket.

7. Insert a new bulb.
8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing,
ensuring that it properly engages. Insert
three screws with washers and tighten as
far as possible.

9. Ensure that the seals are applied to the 10. Insert the bulb housing in the body,
bulb holder and fixing screws. engaging the lug and the ball pin in
the recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts
using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach
the plug connector. Close and engage
the flap.
11. Carry out the following steps to ensure
proper function of the tail lamps:
Switch on ignition
Operate brake
Switch on parking lamps.

Saloon 3-door 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear.
1. To replace bulbs, fold the cover down. 3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen
fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3
and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt
wrench 3, see vehicle tools 3 236.

5. Remove the round seal from the Bulbs in bulb carrier: 9. Ensure that the seals are applied to the
fastening bolt. Press the locking tabs on 1 = Reversing light bulb holder and fixing screws.
the outside of the bulb holder outward
and remove the bulb holder. 2 = Flasher
3 = Reversing light/brake light
4 = Reversing light
5 = Fog tail lamp (only on one
side in certain countries)
8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing,
ensuring that it properly engages.

10. Insert the bulb housing in the body, Estate, Delivery Van 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder.
engaging the lug and the ball pin in the 1. Disengage cover by pressing retaining 3. Hold the outside of the bulb housing,
recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts lugs and remove. unscrew the three fastening nuts and
using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the remove the bulb housing rearwards.
plug connector. Close and engage the
flap.
Switch on ignition.
Operate brake.
6. Insert a new bulb. Insert the bulb holder

in the bulb housing and screw in place.
Insert the bulb housing into the body and
tighten the fastening nuts by hand.
Attach the plug connector. Close and
engage the cover.
Switch on ignition.
Operate brake.

4. Unscrew the three screws with a Bulbs in bulb carrier:
screwdriver and remove the bulb holder. 1 = Reversing light/brake light
Vehicle tools 3 236.
2 = Flasher
3 = Reversing light
4 = Fog tail lamp (only on one
side in certain countries)

Astra TwinTop 2. Remove bulb housing from outside. 4. Disengage sockets by turning and
1. Unscrew retaining nuts. Disengage plug by pressing on flap remove. Press locking tabs on the long
and remove from bulb holder. sides of the bulb holder outwards; lift
3. Detach seal from bulb holder. bulb holder at front end (arrow) and
remove.

Switch on ignition.
Operate brake.

Bulbs in bulb carrier: 8. Fit seal on bulb holder as illustrated.
1 = Reversing light/brake light Ensure that the seal is flat in the area
of the screws.
2 = Reversing light
3 = Fog tail lamp (only on one 9. Engage plug. Insert lamp housing in
side in certain countries) body, ensuring proper positioning of
the ball pins in the recesses. Tighten
4 = Reversing light the retaining nuts.
5 = Flasher
7. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing by first
inserting the lug at the front of the plug.
Fold together bulb holder, ensuring that
it engages properly. Insert sockets and
engage by turning.

Number plate lamp 2. Remove bulb housing downward, taking 4. Rotate bulb socket anticlockwise and
1. Insert screwdriver vertically in bulb insert care not to pull on the cable. disengage.
as illustrated in figure. Press to the side 3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb 5. Remove bulb from socket.
and release spring. socket. 6. Insert a new bulb.
7. Insert bulb holder into bulb housing and
engage by turning it clockwise.
8. Connect plug to bulb socket.
9. Insert and engage bulb housing.

Courtesy lamps Glove compartment lighting, luggage 2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip
Front courtesy lamp, reading lamps 3 compartment lighting, foot well lighting 3 and remove.
1. Disengage lens by hand at location 1. Prise the lamp out with a screwdriver. 3. Insert a new bulb.
illustrated in figure, press it downward
4. Insert lamp in opening and engage in
slightly and remove at a downward
position.
angle.
Instrument illumination,
Information display illumination 3
3. Insert a new bulb. Have the bulb changed by a workshop.
4. Mount lens and engage in position.
Rear courtesy lights 3,
rear reading lights 3
Have the bulb changed by a workshop.
Vehicle care Washing Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the

When caring for your vehicle, observe all The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use
national environmental regulations, to environmental influences. Wash and separate leathers for paint and window
particularly when washing it. wax the vehicle regularly. When using surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows
automatic car washes, select a programme will impair vision.
Regular, thorough care helps to improve which includes waxing.
the appearance of your vehicle and Tar spots must not be removed with hard
maintain its value over the years. It is also Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen objects. Use Tar Removal Spray on painted
prerequisite for warranty claims for any and the like should be cleaned off surfaces.
paint or corrosion damage. The following immediately, as they contain aggressive Polishing and waxing
pages contain tips for vehicle care which, constituents which can cause paint Wax your vehicle regularly (at the latest
if used properly, will help combat the damage. when water no longer beads). Otherwise,
unavoidable, damaging effects of the When using a car wash, follow the the paintwork will dry out.
environment. manufacturers instructions. Switch off the Polishing is necessary only if the paint has
windscreen wipers and rear window wiper. become dull or if solid deposits have
Unscrew the antenna 3 and roof rack 3, become attached to it.
standing on the door sill for ease of reach.
Paintwork polish with silicone forms
If you wash your vehicle by hand, make a protective film, making waxing
sure that the insides of the wings are unnecessary.
also thoroughly rinsed out.
Plastic body parts should not be
Clean edges and folds on opened doors treated with wax and polish.
and flaps as well as the areas they cover.
Wheels and tyres Plastic and rubber parts Windows and wiper blades
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. Plastic and rubber parts can be cleaned Clean using a soft lint-free cloth or chamois
Use a pH-neutral wheel cleaning agent to with the same agents as the rest of the leather together with window cleaner or
clean the wheels. body. Use interior cleaner if necessary. Do insect remover.
not use any other agent, and in particular Make sure that the heating element on the
Wheels are painted and can be treated do not use solvents or fuel. Do not use high-
with the same agents as the body. inside of the window is not damaged when
pressure jet cleaners. cleaning the window.
Paintwork damage Interior and upholstery
Repair minor paintwork damage with a For mechanical removal of ice, use a sharp-
Clean the vehicle interior, including the edged ice scraper. Press the scraper firmly
touch-up pen before rust forms. Entrust instrument panel fascia with a dry cloth
repair of major paintwork damage or rust against the glass so that no dirt can get
only or with interior cleaner. under it and scratch the glass.
to a workshop.
The instrument panel should only be Clean smearing wiper blades with a soft
Exterior lights cleaned using a soft damp cloth.
Headlamp and other protective lamp cloth and window cleaner.
bezels are made of plastic. Do not use any Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum Sun roof 3
abrasive or caustic agents, do not use an cleaner and brush. Use an upholstery Never clean with solvents or abrasive
ice scraper, and do not clean them dry. cleaner to remove stains. agents, fuels, aggressive media (e.g. paint
Clean seat belts with lukewarm water or cleaner, acetone-containing solutions etc.),
interior cleaner. acidic or highly alkaline media or abrasive
pads.
Caution
No stickers may be applied to the sun roof.
Open Velcro fasteners on clothing could
damage seat upholstery. Make sure
Velcro fasteners are closed.
Locks Underbody Astra TwinTop

The locks are factory-lubricated with a high Parts of the underbody have PVC Treat all seals, e. g. on the roof and
quality lock cylinder grease. This prevents underbody protection while critical areas windscreen frame, with silicone oil from
the locks from freezing. Only use de-icer in have a permanent protective wax coating. time to time. Good contact between the
urgent cases as this destroys the grease Check the underbody after washing and fine rubber lips and the sealing surfaces
and damages the function of the locks. have it waxed if necessary. prevents leaks and reduces clamping
After using de-icer, have a workshop forces.
regrease the locks. Bitumen/ rubber materials can damage the
PVC coating. We recommend that you The roof can be held in an intermediate
Engine compartment have underbody work carried out by a position for about 9 minutes by releasing
Areas of the engine compartment that are workshop the operating switch in order to clean roof
painted in the same colour as the vehicle spaces.
must be looked after like any other painted The underbody should be washed and its
protective wax layer checked before and Intermediate roof position for cleaning
surface. 3 58.
after the winter season.
It is advisable to wash the engine Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.
compartment before and after winter and
preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and Towing equipment
brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets Do not clean the coupling ball bar with
before washing the engine. steam or high-pressure jet cleaners.
When washing the engine with a steam-jet
cleaner, do not direct the steam jet at
components of the anti-lock braking
system, the air conditioning system, the
climate control system or the belt drive and
its components.
After washing the engine, have a workshop
protect all parts in the engine
compartment with protective wax.
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.
274 Opel Service, maintenance
Opel Service, Planned maintenance Service plan

The service intervals apply under normal The European Service Plan applies to the
maintenance operating conditions. For extreme following countries: Andorra, Austria,
operating conditions 3 281. Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic,
Service interval display 3 283. Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Greenland, Hungary,
European service intervals Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania,
Every 30,000 km or annually, whichever Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway,
Planned maintenance ......................... 274 occurs first Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia,
Service plan.......................................... 274 Spain, Sweden, Switzerland and the UK.
International service intervals
Additional servicing............................. 281
Every 15,000 km or annually, whichever The International Service Plan applies to all
Recommended fluids and lubricants 281 occurs first other countries.
Inspection system ................................ 283
Genuine Opel parts and accessories 284 Confirmation
Service is confirmed in the relevant fields
Performing work .................................. 284
of the Service and Warranty Booklet. The
Engine oil .............................................. 285 service workshop fills out the date and
Diesel fuel filter .................................... 287 mileage and provides its stamp and
Coolant ................................................. 287 signature.
Brakes ................................................... 288
Make sure that the Service and Warranty
Brake fluid ............................................ 288 Booklet is correctly filled out as proof
Windscreen wiper replacement .......... 289 of uninterrupted service is important to
Windscreen and headlamp washer warranty and settlement claims and is
systems 3........................................... 290 an advantage when selling the vehicle.
Battery .................................................. 290
Protecting electronic components ..... 291
Storage for a long period of time ...... 291
Putting the vehicle back into
operation ........................................... 291
Opel Service, maintenance 275
European Service Plan

Service work after year1) 1 2 3 4 5
km (x 1,000)1) 30 60 90 120 150
Control, lighting and signalling devices and airbags - visually check, x x x x x
steering column lock and ignition switch - check
Remote control: replace batteries (dont forget the spare key) every 2 years
Windscreen wipers, windscreen washer system, headlamp washer system - check, x x x x x
correct
Coolant level and anti-freeze protection - check2), correct x x x x x
Note the anti-freeze temperature protection in the Service and Warranty Booklet
(confirmation fields)
Fluid-filled hoses - check for leaks and proper attachment x x x x x
Brake fluid level - check2), correct x x x
Battery eyes and battery terminals - check for proper seating x x x x x
Vehicle system check with TECH 2 x x x x x
Pollen filter or active carbon filter - replace x x
In greatly polluted air; high levels of airborne dust, sand or pollen; Upon agreement between customer
o abnormal noise from the air conditioning system and Opel Partner
Air cleaner element - replace every 4 years / 60,000 km
Spark plugs - replace every 4 years / 60,000 km
Ribbed belt - check visually x x
Replace ribbed V-belt every 10 years / 150,000 km
Z 13 DTH, Z 17 DTH, Z 17 DTJ, Z 17 DTR, A 17 DTJ, A 17 DTR
Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DTH
1)
Whichever occurs first.
2)
If loss is too great/leaks are present, follow-up work after customer approval.
Additional operations.
o The intervals are reduced under extreme operating conditions or if required by national legislation.

km (x 1,000)1) 30 60 90 120 150
Check and adjust valve clearance every 10 years / 150,000 km
Z 16 LET, Z 16 XER, Z16XE1, Z 18 XER,
Z 17 DTH, Z 17 DTJ, Z 17 DTR, A 17 DTJ, A 17 DTR
Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL every 2 years / 60,000 km
Toothed belt and tension roller - replace every 8 years / 120,000 km
Z 17 DTH every 10 years / 90,000 km
Z 16 LET, Z 16 XER, Z 16 XE1, Z 18 XER, every 10 years / 150,000 km
Z/A 17 DTJ, Z/A 17 DTR, Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL,
Power steering - check visually for leaks; fluid level - check x x x x x
EHPS fluid level - check (cover with dipstick) x x x x x
Engine oil and engine oil filter - change x x x x x
o Diesel fuel filter - drain water x x x x x
(if humidity is high and/or fuel of a lower grade is used)
Diesel fuel filter - replace and drain water (Grade EN 590) x x
Petrol fuel filter - replace (Grade EN 228), exterior every 4 years/60,000 km
Hand brake - check, adjust (wheels unladen); wheel suspension and springing front x x
and rear, brake lines, brake pressure hoses, fuel lines, level control and exhaust
system - check visually
Exterior body/underbody corrosion protection - check; x x x x x
note damage in Service and Warranty Booklet
Front and rear wheel brakes - check visually 2); x x
no wheel change with tyre pressure monitoring system!
o Annual service check, if vehicle travels more than 20,000 km annually
Engine, transmission (AT, MT), A/C compressor - check visually for leaks2) x x x x x
1)
2)

km (x 1,000)1) 30 60 90 120 150
o Brake drum - remove, clean, check visually every 4 years / 60,000 km
Steering system boots, track rods, final drive - check visually x x x x x
Track rod end and support ball joint - check x x x x x
Brake and clutch fluid (MTA) - change every 2 years
Wheel fasteners (take care if vehicle has tyre pressure monitoring system) - slacken
and tighten to 110 Nm
Lightly grease or oil wheel bolt taper before fitting.
x x
Tyre condition - check. Tyre pressure (including spare wheel) - check, correct.
With tyre inflation system - check completeness and expiration date of kit.
Replace sealant bottle every 4 years.
Annual service check, if vehicle travels more than 20,000 km annually
First-aid kit (in its designated spot, intact, valid expiration date), towing eyes, every 2 years
warning triangle - check visually
Headlamp setting (including auxiliary headlamps) - check, correct x x
Door hinges, door stop, lock cylinder, striker plate, bonnet closure, tailgate hinges - x x
lubricate; wipe the door stop retaining strap before greasing
Road test, final check (steering column lock and ignition switch, instruments and x x x x x
control indicators, brake system, steering, air conditioning system, engine, bodywork
and chassis - check); service interval display - reset with TECH 2
For Germany only: perform emission check (AU) and general inspection (HU) First time after 3 years, then every 2 years
For commercial conveyance of passengers, taxis, ambulances, rental cars, etc. annually
1)
International Service Plan

km (x 1,000)1) 15 30 45 60 75
Control, lighting and signalling devices and airbags - visually check, x x x x x
steering column lock and ignition switch - check
Remote control: replace batteries (dont forget the spare key) every 2 years
Windscreen wipers, windscreen washer system, headlamp washer system - check, x x x x x
correct
Coolant level and anti-freeze protection - check2), correct x x x x x
Note the anti-freeze temperature protection in the Service and Warranty Booklet
(confirmation fields)
Fluid-filled hoses - check for leaks and proper attachment x x x x x
Brake fluid level - check2), correct x x x
Battery eyes and battery terminals - check for proper seating x x x x x
Vehicle system check with TECH 2 x x x x x
Pollen filter or active carbon filter - replace x x
In greatly polluted air; high levels of airborne dust, sand or pollen; Upon agreement between customer
o abnormal noise from the air conditioning system and Opel Partner
Air cleaner element - replace every 4 years / 60,000 km
Spark plugs - replace every 4 years / 60,000 km
Ribbed belt - check visually x x
Z 13 DTH, Z 17 DTH, Z 17 DTJ, Z 17 DTR, A 17 DTJ, A 17 DTR
Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DTH
1)
2)

km (x 1,000)1) 15 30 45 60 75
Check and adjust valve clearance every 10 years / 150,000 km
Z 16 LET, Z 16 XER, Z16XE1, Z 18 XER,
Z 17 DTH, Z 17 DTJ, Z 17 DTR, A 17 DTJ, A 17 DTR
Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL every 2 years / 60,000 km
Toothed belt and tension roller - replace every 8 years / 120,000 km
Z 17 DTH every 10 years / 90,000 km
Z 16 LET, Z 16 XER, Z 16 XE1, Z 18 XER, every 10 years / 150,000 km
Z/A 17 DTJ, Z/A 17 DTR, Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL,
Power steering - check visually for leaks; fluid level - check x x x x x
EHPS fluid level - check (cover with dipstick) x x x x x
Engine oil and engine oil filter - change x x x x x
o Diesel fuel filter - drain water x x x x x
(if humidity is high and/or fuel of a lower grade is used)
Diesel fuel filter - replace and drain water (Grade EN 590) x x
Petrol fuel filter - replace (Grade EN 228), exterior every 4 years / 60,000 km
Hand brake - check, adjust (wheels unladen); wheel suspension and springing front x x
and rear, brake lines, brake pressure hoses, fuel lines, level control and exhaust system
- check visually
Exterior body/underbody corrosion protection - check; note damage in Service and x x x x x
Warranty Booklet
Front and rear wheel brakes - check visually 2); no wheel change with tyre pressure x x
monitoring system!
o Annual service check, if vehicle travels more than 20,000 km annually
Engine, transmission (AT, MT), A/C compressor - check visually for leaks2) x x x x x
1)
2)

km (x 1,000)1) 15 30 45 60 75
Brake drum - remove, clean, check visually every 4 years / 60,000 km
o
Steering system boots, track rods, final drive - check visually x x x x x
Track rod end and support ball joint - check x x x x x
Brake and clutch fluid (MTA) - change every 2 years
Wheel fasteners (take care if vehicle has tyre pressure monitoring system) - slacken
and tighten to 110 Nm
Lightly grease or oil wheel bolt taper before fitting.
x x
Tyre condition - check. Tyre pressure (including spare wheel) - check, correct.
With tyre inflation system - check completeness and expiration date of kit. Replace
sealant bottle every 4 years.
Annual service check, if vehicle travels more than 20,000 km annually
First-aid kit (in its designated spot, intact, valid expiration date), towing eyes, every 2 years
warning triangle - check visually
Headlamp setting (including auxiliary headlamps) - check, correct x x
Door hinges, door stop, lock cylinder, striker plate, bonnet closure, tailgate hinges - x x
lubricate; wipe the door stop retaining strap before greasing
Road test, final check (steering column lock and ignition switch, instruments and x x x x x
control indicators, brake system, steering, air conditioning system, engine,
bodywork and chassis - check); service interval display - reset with TECH 2
1)
Additional servicing Under extreme operating conditions, Recommended fluids and

Additional operations it may be necessary to have certain lubricants
Additional operations are not required scheduled service work done more Only use products that have been tested
every service but can be performed in frequently than the scheduled intervals. and approved. Damage resulting from the
conjunction with a regular service. Seek technical advice on servicing use of non-approved operating materials
Time allowances for additional operations requirements based on your vehicles will not be covered by the warranty.
are not included in the scope of regular specific operating conditions.
services and there will be additional 9 Warning
charges for such work. It is more economic Operating materials are hazardous and
to have these operations performed as require caution when handling. In the
part of a scheduled service than to have event of contact, seek medical attention
them performed separately. immediately. Do not inhale vapours and
Extreme operating conditions o avoid contact with the skin. Keep out of
Extreme operating conditions exist when reach of children. Operating materials
at least one of the following occurs must not be allowed to contaminate
frequently: wastewater, surface water,
z cold starts, groundwater or the ground. Dispose of
empty containers properly. Always bear
z stop-and-go traffic, in mind that operating materials are
z wagon/trailer towing harmful to health.
z gradients and/or high altitudes,
z poor road surfaces,
z sand and dust,
z extreme temperature fluctuations.
Police vehicles, taxis and driving school
vehicles are also classified as operating
under extreme conditions.
Engine oil Filling engine oil Engine oil additives

Engine oil is identified by its grade and its Engine oils of different manufacturers and The use of engine oil additives could cause
viscosity. Grade is more important than brands can be mixed as long as they damage and invalidate the warranty.
viscosity when selecting which engine oil to comply with the engine oil criteria (grade Engine oil viscosity
use. and viscosity). Only use engine oil viscosities 0W-30,
Engine oil grade for European Service Plan Not all engine oils on the market meet 0W-40, 5W-30 or 5W-40.
GM-LL-A-025: Petrol engines these quality criteria. Always check the The SAE viscosity rating defines the ability
specifications and classifications on the of an oil to flow. Oil is more viscous when
GM-LL-B-025: Diesel engines
container. cold than when hot.
GM General Motors Europe If engine oil of the required quality is Multigrade oil is indicated by two figures.
LL Longlife not available, a maximum of 1 litre of The first figure, followed by a W, indicates
ACEA A3/B4 or A3/B3 grade may be used low temperature viscosity and the second
A or B Engine oil grade specification (only once between each oil change). The figure the high temperature viscosity.
025 Validity index viscosity should be of the correct rating.
Use of ACEA A1/B1 and A5/B5 engine oil is
Opel engine oil meets classifications
expressly forbidden, since they can cause
GM-LL-A-025 and GM-LL-B-025 and is
long-term engine damage under certain
therefore suitable for both petrol and
operating conditions.
diesel engines.
Engine oil grade for International Service
Plan
ACEA-A3: Petrol engines
ACEA-B4: Diesel engines without diesel
particle filter
ACEA-C3 Diesel engines with diesel
particle filter
The service interval display takes account Further information on maintenance and
of off-the-road periods during which the the inspection system can be found in the
battery is disconnected. Service and Warranty Booklet, which is in
Flexible service interval 3 the glove compartment.
The length of the service intervals is based Have service work and repairs to the
on several parameters stemming from bodywork and components performed
usage. For this reason, various properly by a workshop. We recommend
engine-specific data is continually your Opel Partner, who has excellent
gathered and is used to calculate the knowledge of Opel vehicles and is in
remaining distance until the next service. possession of the necessary tools and
If the remaining distance is less than current service instructions from Opel. To
1500 km, InSP is displayed with a exclude the possibility of loss of warranty,
remaining distance of 1000 km when the use of an Opel Partner is recommended in
Picture no: 17008t.tif ignition is switched on and off. If less than particular during the warranty period. For
Inspection system 1000 km remains, InSP is displayed for further information see the Service and
several seconds. Have the next service Warranty Booklet.
In order to guarantee economical and safe
vehicle operation and to maintain the performed by a workshop within one week Separate anti-corrosion service
value of your vehicle, it is of vital or 500 km (whichever occurs first). Have performed at the intervals prescribed
importance that all maintenance work is Display of remaining distance: in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
carried out at the proper intervals as
specified. 1. Switch off ignition.
Fixed service interval 2. Briefly press the trip odometer reset
When it is time for servicing, InSP appears button. The odometer reading is shown.
in the odometer display when the ignition is 3. Press and hold the reset button again for
switched on. Have the service work carried about 2 seconds. InSP and the remaining
out by a workshop within one week or distance are displayed.
500 km (whichever occurs first).
Genuine Opel parts and

accessories
We recommend that you use "Genuine Opel
Parts and Accessories" and conversion parts
expressly approved for your vehicle type.
These parts have undergone special tests to
establish their reliability, safety and specific
suitability for Opel vehicles. Despite
continuous market monitoring, we cannot
assess or guarantee these attributes for
other products, even if they have been
granted approval by the relevant
authorities or in some other form.
"Genuine Opel Parts and Accessories" and Picture no: 17304t.tif Picture no: 17305t.tif
conversion parts approved by Opel can be Performing work
9 Warning
obtained from your Opel Partner, who can To avoid injury from moving parts and
provide comprehensive advice about cables conducting ignition voltage, only The ignition system 3 and Xenon
permissible technical changes and ensure carry out engine compartment checks headlamp system 3 operate under high
that the part is installed correctly. (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil voltage. Do not touch.
level) when the ignition is switched off.
The caps that are used when topping up
9 Warning engine oil, coolant and washer fluid as well
as the oil dipstick may be coloured yellow
Only carry out engine compartment
to aid identification.
checks when the ignition is off.
The cooling fan can run even if the
ignition is off.

Engine oil Check with the vehicle on a level surface. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, insert it
On vehicles with engine oil level check 3, The engine must be at operating to the stop on the handle, pull it out and
engine oil level is checked automatically temperature and must have been off read the engine oil level.
3 112. We recommend that you check the for at least 5 minutes. Insert the dipstick to the stop on the handle
engine oil level before starting off on any and make half a turn.
long journey.
Different dipsticks are used depending on
engine variant.
When the engine oil level has dropped to
the MIN mark, top up engine oil.

We recommend use of the same engine oil The engine oil level must not exceed Capacity between MIN and MAX marks
as used previously. the MAX mark on the dipstick. 3 330.
Fit the cap on straight and tighten it.
Caution
Overfilled engine oil must be drained or
suctioned out.
Diesel fuel filter Coolant

On each engine oil change, have the fuel The coolant protects against freezing
filter checked for any water residue by a down to approx. -28 C.
workshop.
Caution
Illumination of A indicates water in the
fuel filter 3. Only use approved anti-freeze
Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals protection.
if the vehicle is subjected to extreme Coolant additives intended to give
operating conditions such as high humidity additional corrosion protection or seal
(primarily in coastal areas), extremely high against minor leaks can cause function
or low outside temperatures and problems. No liability will be accepted
substantially varying daytime and for damage resulting from the use of
night-time temperatures. coolant additives.
. Antifreeze and corrosion protection
Before the start of winter, have a workshop
9 Warning check the antifreeze protection. The
antifreeze level must guarantee protection
Antifreeze is a danger to health; it must
to approx. -28 C. Insufficient antifreeze
therefore be kept in the original
will reduce the frost protection level and
container and out of the reach of
the corrosion protection. If necessary add
children.
antifreeze.
If coolant loss is topped up with water,
have concentration checked and add
antifreeze if necessary.
Top up with anti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is

available, use clean tap water or distilled
water. Have the anti-freeze protection
checked.
Have the cause of coolant loss remedied
by a workshop.
Caution
Too low a coolant level can cause
engine damage.
Fit the cap on straight and tighten it.
Picture no: 17313t.tif Brakes Picture no: 17314t.tif

Coolant level A squealing noise indicates that the brake Brake fluid
The is practically no loss in a closed cooling lining is at its minimum thickness.
system. Continued driving is possible, but have the 9 Warning
If the cooling system is cold, the coolant brake lining replaced as soon as possible.
Brake fluid is poisonous and corrosive.
level should be above the KALT/COLD Once new brake lining is installed, do Avoid contact with eyes, skin, fabrics
mark. Top up if the level is low. not brake unnecessarily hard for the and painted surfaces.
first 200 km.
9 Warning The brake fluid level must be between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
Allow engine to cool down before
removing the coolant filler cap. Remove When topping up, ensure maximum
the filler cap carefully so that pressure cleanliness as contamination of the brake
can escape slowly. fluid can lead to function problems in the
braking system.
Only use high-performance brake fluid
approved for your vehicle. Use DOT4 brake
fluid only.
After correcting the brake fluid level, have
a workshop eliminate the cause of the
brake fluid loss.
Brake fluid change

Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs
water. If the brakes become hot, such as
when driving on long downhill stretches,
vapour bubbles can occur in the water,
which can have an extremely adverse
effect on braking power (depending
on the proportion of water).
Also follow the prescribed change
intervals.
9 Warning
Have the brake fluid changed by

a workshop. Observe the legal
requirements for disposal of brake Windscreen wiper replacement Wiper blades on the windscreen
Service setting for windscreen wipers Activate service setting - see previous
fluid to protect the environment and column. Raise wiper arm, tilt wiper blade
your health. Within 4 seconds from turning off the
ignition, with the key still in the lock 3 or for at a 90 to the wiper arm and remove to
the Open&Start System 3 after switching the side.
off the ignition and before opening the
drivers door, press the wiper stalk down.
Release wiper stalk as soon as the wipers
are vertical.

Wiper blade on the rear window 3 Windscreen and headlamp Battery
Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper blade as washer systems 3 The battery is maintenance-free.
shown in illustration and remove. The fluid reservoir filler neck for the Batteries do not belong in household
windscreen washer system and headlamp waste. They must be disposed of at an
washer system 3 is located at the front appropriate recycling collection station.
next to the left headlamp.
Fitting of electrical or electronic accessories
Fill with clean water mixed with cleaner at a later date can discharge or add extra
and anti-frost protection. load to the battery. Take advice on the
Ensure sufficient anti-freeze protection. technical possibilities, e.g. use of a more
powerful battery.
When closing the reservoir, press the lid
firmly over the beaded edge all the way Laying up the vehicle for more than
round. 4 weeks can lead to battery discharge.
Disconnect the clamp from the negative
terminal of the vehicle battery.
Ensure the ignition is off before connecting
or disconnecting the vehicle battery.
Protecting electronic components Storage for a long period of time z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place.
In order to prevent faults in electronic In order to prevent damage, the following With manual transmission or manual
components in the electrical system, never must be done if the vehicle will be stored transmission automated 3, engage 1st
connect or disconnect battery with engine for several months. or reverse gear. With automatic
running or ignition switched on. Never start transmission 3, move selector lever to P.
z Wash and wax the vehicle 3 271. Use chocks or the like to prevent the
engine with battery disconnected, e.g.
when starting using jump leads. z Have the wax in the engine vehicle from rolling.
compartment and underbody checked. z Do not apply hand brake.
To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not
make any modifications to the electrical z Clean and wax rubber seals. z Disconnect the clamp from the negative
system, e. g. connecting additional Intermediate position of Astra Twin-Top terminal of the vehicle battery.
consumers or tampering with electronic roof for cleaning 3 58.
control units (chip tuning). z Change the engine oil. Putting the vehicle back into
z Check frost and corrosion protection operation
9 Warning Perform the following work before
3 287.
Electronic ignition systems generate very recommissioning the vehicle:
z Check coolant level, top up antifreeze if
high voltages. Do not touch the ignition necessary 3 288. z Connect the clamp from the negative
system; high voltage can be fatal. terminal of the vehicle battery.
z Empty windscreen washer system and
headlamp washer system. z Check tyre pressure 3 319.
z Increase tyre pressure to specified value z Top up windscreen washer system 3 290.
for full load 3 319. z Check engine oil level 3 285.
z Check coolant level 3 288.
z Fit the number plates if necessary.
292 Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle data......................................... 292 Picture no: 17321t.tif Picture no: 17322t.tif

Engine data.......................................... 294 Vehicle data Information on identification plate:
Performance,........................................ 298 The technical data is determined in 1 Manufacturer
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions ...... 302 accordance with European Community 2 Type approval number
standards. We reserve the right to make 3 Vehicle identification number
Weights, payload and roof load ........ 311
modifications. Specifications in the vehicle
Tyres ..................................................... 319 4 Gross vehicle weight rating
documents always have priority over those
Capacities ............................................ 330 given in this manual. 5 Permissible gross train weight
Dimensions ........................................... 331 6 Maximum permissible front axle load
The identification plate is affixed to the 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load
Installation dimensions of
front right door frame.
trailer towing equipment.................. 332 8 Vehicle-specific or country-specific
data
Technical data 293
Engine code and engine number: stamped

on left-hand side of engine on crankcase.

The vehicle identification number is The vehicle identification number may be
stamped on the identification plate and in embossed on the instrument panel.
the vehicle floor on the right-hand side
under a cover between the front passenger
door and seat.
294 Technical data
Engine data
Sales designation 1.21) 1.4 1.61) 1.6 1.6
Engine identifier code Z 12 XEP Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 16 LET
Number of cylinders 4 4 4 4 4
3
Piston displacement [cm ] 1229 1364 1598 1598 1598
Brake horse power [kW] 59 66 77 85 132
at rpm 5600 5600 6000 6000 5500
Torque [Nm] 110 125 150 155 230
at rpm 4000 4000 3900 4000 1980 to 5500
Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol
2)
Octane requirement [RON]
recommended 95 (P)3) 95 (S)3) 95 (P)3) 95 (P)3) 95 (S)3)
possible 98 (PP)3) 98 (SP)3) 98 (PP)3) 98 (PP)3) 98 (SP)3)
possible 91 (R)3)4) 91 (N)3)4) 91 (R)3)4) 91 (R)3)4) 5)
Oil consumption [l/1000 km] 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
1)
Only for markets outside of the EU.
2)
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; N = Normal (Regular), S = Super (Premium), SP = Super Plus (Premium Plus); value printed in bold:
recommended fuel.
3)
Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).
4)
Use of 91 RON fuel reduces power and torque.
5)
The use of fuel with an octane number of 91 RON is not permitted.
Technical data 295
Engine data
Sales designation 1.8 2.0 Turbo OPC
Engine identifier code Z 18 XER Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH
Number of cylinders 4 4 4
3
Piston displacement [cm ] 1796 1998 1998
Brake horse power [kW] 103 147 177
at rpm 6300 5400 5600
Torque [Nm] 1751) 262 320
at rpm 3800 4200 2400 to 5000
Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Petrol
2)
Octane requirement [RON]
recommended 95 (P)3) 95 (S)3) 95 (P)3)6)
possible 98 (PP)3) 98 (SP)3) 98 (PP) 3)
possible 91 (R)3)4) 91 (N)3)5) 91 (R)3)5)
Oil consumption [l/1000 km] 0.6 0.6 0.6
1)
For versions with automatic transmission 170 Nm.
2)
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; N = Normal, S = Super, SP = Super Plus; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.
3)
Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).
4)
Use of 91 RON fuel reduces power and torque.
5)
If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous terrain with a
caravan/trailer load or high payload.
6)
Use of 95 RON fuel reduces power and torque. Slight increase in fuel consumption.
296 Technical data
Engine data
Sales designation 1.3 CDTI 1.7 CDTI 1.7 1.7
Engine identifier code Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR
Number of cylinders 4 4 4 4
3
Piston displacement [cm ] 1248 1686 1686 1686
Brake horse power [kW] 66 74 81 92
at rpm 4000 4400 3800 4000
Torque [Nm] 200 240 260 280
at rpm 1750 to 2500 2300 2300 2300
Type of fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel
1) 2) 2) 2)
Cetane requirement [CN] 49 (D) 49 (D) 49 (D) 49 (D)2)
Oil consumption [l/1000 km] 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
1)
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.
2)
A lower value is possible with winter diesel fuels.
Technical data 297
Engine data
Sales designation 1.9 CDTI 1.9 CDTI 1.9 CDTI
Engine code Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH
Number of cylinders 4 4 4
3
Piston displacement [cm ] 1910 1910 1910
Brake horse power [kW] 74 88 110
at rpm 3500 3500 4000
Torque [Nm] 260 280 320
at rpm 1700 to 2500 2000 to 2750 2000 to 2750
Type of fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
1) 2) 2)
Cetane requirement [CN] 49 (D) 49 (D) 49 (D)2)
Oil consumption [l/1000 km] 0.6 0.6 0.6
1)
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.
298 Technical data
Performance,
Saloon 5-door
Engine Z 12 XEP Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER
1)
Maximum speed [km/h]
Manual transmission 171 178 191 221 208
Manual transmission automated 176 186 192
Engine Z 20 LER Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR

1)
Manual transmission 230 172 180 185/1882) 195
Manual transmission automated 171
Automatic transmission
Engine Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH

1)
Manual transmission 180 194 2083)
Manual transmission automated
1)
The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified
maximum speed of the vehicle.
2)
For model with pollutant reduction.
3)
The maximum speed is limited electronically.
Technical data 299
Performance, 3-door Saloon

Engine Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 20 LER
1)
Manual transmission automated 178 188 194
Engine Z 20 LEH Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR

1)
Manual transmission 244 174 182 187/1882) 197
Manual transmission automated 174

1)
Manual transmission 182 196 2103)
1)
2)
3)
300 Technical data
Performance, Estate
Engine Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER
1)
Manual transmission 178 191 221 207
Manual transmission automated 186 192
Engine Z 20 LER Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ

1)
Manual transmission 230 172 180 185/1882)
Engine Z 17 DTR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH

1)
Manual transmission 195 180 193 2073)
1)
2)
3)
Technical data 301
Performance, Delivery Van

Engine Z 14 XEP Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ
1)
Manual transmission 178 172 180 185
Engine Z 17 DTR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH
1)
Manual transmission 195 180 193 2072)
Performance, TwinTop
Engine Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 20 LER Z 19 DTH
1)
1)
2)
302 Technical data
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions The directive is oriented to actual driving The figures given must not be taken as a
Directive 80/1268/EEC (last modified practices: Urban driving is rated at guarantee for the actual fuel consumption
by 2004/3/EC) has applied for the approx. 1/3 and off-road driving with of a particular vehicle.
measurement of fuel consumption approx. 2/3 (urban and extra-urban All values are based on the EU base model
since 1996. consumption). Cold starts and acceleration with standard equipment.
phases are also taken into consideration.
The calculation of fuel consumption as
The specification of CO2 emission is also a specified by directive 2004/3/EC takes
constituent of the directive. account of the vehicles kerb weight,
ascertained in accordance with these
regulations. Optional extras may result in
slightly higher fuel consumption and CO2
emission levels than those quoted.
Saving fuel, Protecting the environment
3 190.
Technical data 303
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions, 5-door saloon (up to tyre size 205 mm1))
Engine Z 12 XEP Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 18 XER
Manual transmission/manual transmission
automated/automatic transmission
urban [l/100 km] 8.0// 8.0/ 7.7/ / 8.6/ 8.7/ 8.5/ 9.7//10.52)
extra-urban [l/100 km] 5.0// 5.0/ 4.9/ / 5.1/ 5.2/ 5.0/ 5.6// 6.22)
total [l/100 km] 6.1// 6.1/ 5.9/ / 6.4/ 6.5/ 6.3/ 7.1// 7.82)
CO2 [g/km] 146// 146/141/ /154/ 155/151/ 169// 1863)
Engine Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR
urban [l/100 km] 6.34)/ 6.44)/ 6.4// 5.6 (6.6)7)// 6.6//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 4.14)/ 4.24)/ 4.2// 3.9 (4.4)7)// 4.4//
total [l/100 km] 4.94)/ 5.04)/ 5.0// 4.5 (5.2)7)// 5.2//
CO2 [g/km] 1305)/1336)/ 135// 119 (138)7)// 138//
1)
For engines Z 17 DTH, Z 17 DTJ and Z 13 DTH with manual transmission automated and tyre width up to 195 mm.
2)
For reduced-weight, country-specific model, fuel consumption reduced by 0.1 l/100 km.
3)
For reduced-weight, country-specific model, CO2 emissions reduced by 2 g/km.
4)
In vehicles with diesel particle filter, fuel consumption increased by 0.2 l/100 km.
5)
In vehicles with diesel particle filter, CO2 emissions increased by 7 g/km.
6)
7)
For model without pollutant reduction.
304 Technical data
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions, 5-door saloon (up to tyre size 225 mm)
Engine Z 12 XEP Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER
urban [l/100 km] 8.2// 8.1/ 7.8/ / 8.8/ 8.8/ 8.6/ 10.3// 9.8//10.61)
extra-urban [l/100 km] 5.2// 5.1/ 5.0/ / 5.3/ 5.3/ 5.1/ 6.2// 5.7//6.31)
total [l/100 km] 6.3// 6.2/ 6.0/ / 6.6/ 6.6/ 6.4/ 7.7// 7.2//7.91)
CO2 [g/km] 151// 148/143/ /158/ 158/153/ 185// 172//1892)
Engine Z 20 LER Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT
urban [l/100 km] 13.1// 6.5// 6.8 // 6.8// 7.23)// 7.23)// 9.71)
extra-urban [l/100 km] 7.1// 4.3// 4.6// 4.6// 4.73)// 4.73)// 5.41)
total [l/100 km] 9.3// 5.1// 5.4// 5.4// 5.63)// 5.63)// 7.01)
CO2 [g/km] 223// 138// 143// 143// 1494)// 1494)//1892)
Engine Z 19 DTH
urban [l/100 km] 7.23)//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 4.73)//
total [l/100 km] 5.63)//
CO2 [g/km] 1494)//
1)
2)
3)
4)
Technical data 305
Engine Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 18 XER
urban [l/100 km] 8.0/ 7.7/ / 8.6/ 8.7/ 8.5/ 9.7//10.4
extra-urban [l/100 km] 5.0/ 4.9/ / 5.1/ 5.2/ 5.0/ 5.6// 6.1
total [l/100 km] 6.1/ 5.9/ / 6.4/ 6.5/ 6.3/ 7.1// 7.7
CO2 [g/km] 146/141/ /154/ 155/151/ 169// 184
urban [l/100 km] 6.34)/ 6.42)/ 6.4// 5.6 (6.6)5)// 6.6//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 4.14)/ 4.24)/ 4.2// 3.9 (4.4)5)// 4.4//
total [l/100 km] 4.94)/ 5.04)/ 5.0// 4.5 (5.2)5)// 5.2//
CO2 [g/km] 1303)/1334)/ 135// 119 (138)5)// 138//
1)
For Z 17 DTJ engine without pollutant reduction up to tyre width of 195 mm.
2)
3)
4)
5)
306 Technical data
urban [l/100 km] 8.1/ 7.8/ / 8.8/ 8.8/ 8.6/ 10.3// 9.8//10.5 13.1//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 5.1/ 5.0/ / 5.3/ 5.3/ 5.1/ 6.2// 5.7// 6.2 7.1//
total [l/100 km] 6.2/ 6.0/ / 6.6/ 6.6/ 6.4/ 7.7// 7.2// 7.8 9.3//
CO2 [g/km] 148/143/ /158/ 158/153/ 185// 172// 186 223//
Engine Z 20 LEH Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR
urban [l/100 km] 13.0// 6.5// 6.8// 6.8//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 7.0// 4.3// 4.6// 4.6//
total [l/100 km] 9.2// 5.1// 5.4// 5.4//
CO2 [g/km] 221// 138// 143// 143//
urban [l/100 km] 7.22)// 7.22)// 9.6 7.22)//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 4.72)// 4.72)// 5.3 4.72)//
total [l/100 km] 5.62)// 5.62)// 6.9 5.62)//
CO2 [g/km] 1493)// 1493)//186 1493)//
1)
For Z 20 LEH engine - tyre width up to 235 mm.
2)
3)
Technical data 307
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions, Estate (up to tyre size 205 mm1))
Engine Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 18 XER
Manual transmission/manual transmission automated/
automatic transmission
urban [l/100 km] 8.0// / 8.7/ 8.8/ 8.6/ 9.82)//10.5
extra-urban [l/100 km] 5.0// / 5.2/ 5.3/ 5.1/ 5.72)//6.2
total [l/100 km] 6.1// / 6.5/ 6.6/ 6.4/ 7.22)//7.8
CO2 [g/km] 146// /156/ 158/153/ 172 3)//186
urban [l/100 km] 6.34)// 6.4// 5.6 (6.7)6)// 6.7//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 4.14)// 4.2// 3.9 (4.5)6)// 4.5//
total [l/100 km] 4.94)// 5.0// 4.5 (5.3)6)// 5.3//
CO2 [g/km] 1305)// 135// 119 (139)6)// 139//
1)
For engines Z 17 DTH, Z 17 DTJ without pollutant reduction and Z 17 DTR up to tyre width of 195 mm.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
308 Technical data
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions, Estate (up to tyre size 225 mm)
urban [l/100 km] 8.1// / 8.9/ 8.9/ 8.7/ 10.3// 9.91)//10.6 13.2//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 5.1// / 5.4/ 5.4/ 5.2/ 6.2// 5.81)// 6.3 7.2//
total [l/100 km] 6.2// / 6.7/ 6.7/ 6.5/ 7.7// 7.31)// 7.9 9.4//
CO2 [g/km] 148// /161/ 159/154/ 185// 1742)// 189 226//
Engine Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR
urban [l/100 km] 6.5// 6.9// 6.9//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 4.3// 4.7// 4.7//
total [l/100 km] 5.1// 5.5// 5.5//
CO2 [g/km] 138// 145// 145//
urban [l/100 km] 7.31)3)// 7.31)3)//9.7 7.31)3)//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 4.81)3)// 4.81)3)//5.4 4.81)3)//
total [l/100 km] 5.71)3)// 5.71)3)//7.0 5.71)3)//
CO2 [g/km] 1512)4)// 1512)4)//189 1512)4)//
1)
2)
3)
4)
Technical data 309
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions, Delivery Van (up to tyre size 205 mm1))
Engine Z 14 XEP Z 13 DTH
urban [l/100 km] 8.0// 6.32)//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 5.0// 4.12)//
total [l/100 km] 6.1// 4.92)//
CO2 [g/km] 146// 1303)//
Engine Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR
urban [l/100 km] 6.4// 6.6// 6.6//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 4.2// 4.4// 4.4//
total [l/100 km] 5.0// 5.2// 5.2//
CO2 [g/km] 135// 138// 138//
1)
For engines Z 17 DTH and Z 17 DTJ up to tyre width of 195 mm.
2)
3)
310 Technical data
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions, Delivery Van (up to tyre size 225 mm)
Engine Z 14 XEP Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR
urban [l/100 km] 8.1// 6.5// 6.8// 6.8//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 5.1// 4.3// 4.6// 4.6//
total [l/100 km] 6.2// 5.1// 5.4// 5.4//
CO2 [g/km] 148// 138// 143// 143//
urban [l/100 km] 7.21)// 7.23)// 9.7 7.23)//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 4.73)// 4.73)// 5.4 4.73)//
total [l/100 km] 5.63)// 5.63)// 7.0 5.63)//
CO2 [g/km] 1492)// 1494)//189 1494)//
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions, TwinTop (up to tyre size 225 mm)
Engine Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 20 LER Z 19 DTH
urban [l/100 km] 9.0// 10.5// 10.0//10.7 13.3// 7.6//
extra-urban [l/100 km] 5.5// 6.4// 5.9// 6.4 7.3// 5.1//
total [l/100 km] 6.8// 7.9// 7.4// 8.0 9.5// 6.0//
CO2 [g/km] 163// 190// 177// 191 228// 159//
1)
2)
Technical data 311
Weights, payload and roof load The combined total of front and rear axle Roof load
The payload is the difference between the loads must not exceed the permissible The permissible roof load is 75 kg and
permitted gross vehicle weight (see gross vehicle weight. For example, if the 100 kg for caravan with roof railing. The
identification plate 3 292) and the EC front axle is bearing its maximum roof load is the combined weight of the
kerb weight. permissible load, the rear axle can only roof rack and the load.
bear a load that is equal to the gross No roof load is permitted with the Astra
To calculate the kerb weight, enter the vehicle weight minus the front axle load.
data for your vehicle below: TwinTop or vehicles with a panoramic
With a connected trailer and full load on window.
z Kerb weight from the towing vehicle including all passengers,
table 1 3 312 +.............. kg Driving hints 3 188. Roof rack,
in the saloon the maximum permitted rear caravan/trailer towing 3 219.
z Additional weight of axle load (see rating plate or vehicle
equipment versions documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg
from table 2 3 316 +.............. kg (5-door) or 70 kg (3-door), and the
z Weight of heavy maximum gross vehicle weight by 45 kg. In
accessories from table 3 the Estate, the maximum permitted rear
3 318 +.............. kg axle load may be exceeded by 60 kg and
the maximum gross vehicle weight by
Total =.............. kg 30 kg. If the maximum permitted rear axle
is the EC kerb weight. load is exceeded, a top speed of 100 km/h
applies. If lower top speeds are stipulated
Optional equipment and accessories
nationally when towing a trailer these must
increase the kerb weight, which means that
be observed.
the payload will also change slightly.
See the identification plate or vehicle
Note the weights given in the vehicle
documents for permissible axle loads.
documents.
312 Technical data
Table 1, kerb weight1), 5-door saloon

Astra Engine Manual Manual transmission Automatic
transmission automated transmission
without/with air Z 12 XEP 1240/1260 / /
conditioning
system [kg] Z 14 XEP 1240/1260 1240/1260 /
Z 16 XE1, Z 16 XER 1270/1290 1270/1290 /
Z 16 LET /1355 / /
Z 18 XER 1278/1298 / 1303/1323
2)
Z 18 XER / / 1278/1298
Z 20 LER /1385 / /
Z 13 DTH 1340/1355 1340/1355 /
Z 17 DTH 1365/1380 / /
Z 17 DTJ, Z 17 DTR 1385/1400 / /
Z 19 DTL 1395/1410 / /
Z 19 DT 1395/1410 / 1425/1440
2)
Z 19 DT / / 1393/1408
Z 19 DTH 1393/1408 / /
1)
According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
2)
Reduced-weight, country-specific models.
Technical data 313
Table 1, kerb weight1), 3-door saloon

without/with air Z 14 XEP 1220/1240 1220/1240 /
conditioning
system [kg] Z 16 XE1, Z 16 XER 1250/1270 1250/1270 /
Z 16 LET /1335 / /
Z 18 XER 1265/1285 / 1278/1298
Z 20 LER /1365 / /
Z 20 LEH /1393 / /
Z 13 DTH 1278/1290 1278/1290 /
Z 13 DTH 1320/1335 1320/1335 /
Z 17 DTH 1345/1360 / /
Z 17 DTJ, Z 17 DTR 1365/1380 / /
Z 19 DTL 1375/1390 / /
Z 19 DT 1375/1390 / 1393/1408
Z 19 DTH 1390/1405 / /
1)
314 Technical data
Table 1, kerb weight1), Estate

conditioning
system [kg] Z 16 XE1, Z 16 XER 1315/1335 1315/1335 /
Z 16 LET /1395 / /
Z 18 XER 1325/1345 / 1350/1370
2)
Z 18 XER 1278/1298 / /
Z 20 LER /1425 / /
Z 13 DTH 1380/1395 1380/1395 /
Z 17 DTH 1393/1408 / /
Z 17 DTJ, Z 17 DTR 1425/1440 / /
Z 19 DTL 1435/1450 / /
2)
Z 19 DTL 1393/1408 / /
Z 19 DT 1435/1450 / 1465/1480
2)
Z 19 DT 1393/1408 / /
Z 19 DTH 1450/1465 / /
2)
Z 19 DTH 1393/1408 / /
1)
2)
Reduced-weight, country-specific models.
Technical data 315
Table 1, kerb weight 1), Delivery Van

conditioning
system [kg] Z 13 DTH 1335/1350 / /
Z 17 DTH 1365/1380 / /
Z 17 DTJ, Z 17 DTR 1385/1400 / /
Z 19 DT 1385/1400 / 1420/1435
Z 19 DTL 1385/1400 / /
Z 19 DTH 1395/1410 / /
Table 1, kerb weight1), TwinTop

without/with air Z 16 XER 1495/1515 / /
conditioning
system [kg] Z 16 LET /1575 / /
Z 18 XER 1500/1520 / 1503/1523
Z 20 LER /1605 / /
Z 19 DTH 1613/1628 / /
1)
316 Technical data
Table 2, Additional weight of equipment variants

Saloon
Engine Z 12 XEP Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 20 LER
Enjoy [kg] 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9
Cosmo [kg] 12 12 12 12 12 12
Sport [kg] 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 12.6

Enjoy [kg] 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9
Cosmo [kg] 12 12 12 12
Sport [kg] 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5

Enjoy [kg] 2.9 2.9 2.9
Cosmo [kg] 12 12 12
Sport [kg] 12.6 12.6 12.6
Technical data 317

Estate
Enjoy [kg] 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9
Cosmo [kg] 12 12 12 12 12
Sport [kg] 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 12.6

Enjoy [kg] 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9
Cosmo [kg] 12 12 12 12
Sport [kg] 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5

Enjoy [kg] 2.9 2.9 2.9
Cosmo [kg] 12 12 12
Sport [kg] 12.6 12.6 24.5
318 Technical data

Delivery Van
Engine Z 14 XEP Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ Z 17 DTR
Enjoy [kg]
Cosmo [kg]
Sport [kg] 19.3 19.3 10.5 10.5 10.5

Enjoy [kg]
Cosmo [kg]
Sport [kg] 10.5 10.5 10.5
Elegance [kg]
Table 3, Heavy accessories

Accessories Sun roof Towing equipment Split rear seat bench
Weight [kg] 23 21 (except TwinTop) 20 (Estate)
26 (TwinTop) 9 (saloon 3/5-door)
Technical data 319
Tyres Winter tyres are permitted on the Astra On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare
Not all tyres available on the market OPC only on special Opel-approved alloy wheel may have a steel rim.
currently meet the structural requirements. wheels. The spare wheel may be fitted with a
We recommend that you consult an Opel Additional information 3 217. smaller tyre1) and smaller wheel than the
Partner concerning suitable tyre makes. wheels fitted to the vehicle.
Tyre chains 3
These tyres have undergone special tests Tyre chains may be used on the front Tyre pressure (overpressure)
to establish their reliability, safety and wheels only. The specified tyre pressures are valid for
specific suitability for Opel vehicles. cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure
Despite continuous market monitoring, we We recommend the use of fine-link snow
chains which amount to max 10 mm on the resulting from extensive driving must not
are unable to assess these attributes for be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on
other tyres, even if they have been granted tread and tyre inner wall with chain lock.
the following pages apply to both summer
approval by the relevant authorities or in Tyre chains are not permitted on the and winter tyres.
some other form. emergency wheel 115/70 R 16 and on
tyres of size 225/45 R 17, 225/40 R 18 Always inflate the spare wheel 3 to the tyre
Additional information 3 212. pressure for full load - see tables on
and 235/35 R 19.
Winter tyres 3 following pages.
Saloon, Estate, Delivery Van: tyre chains
Tyres of size 215/45 R 17, 225/45 R 17, Temporary spare wheel 3 tyre pressure -
are only approved on tyres of size
225/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19 are not to see tables on next page.
215/45 R 17 if the vehicle was equipped
be used as winter tyres.
with 18-inch wheels in the factory. In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
Saloon, Estate, Delivery Van: tyres of size system 3 there is an adapter in the valve
Additional information 3 218.
215/45 R 17 are only approved as winter cap key. Screw adapter to valve before
tyres if the vehicle was equipped with Wheels attaching tyre pressure gauge, 3 213.
18-inch wheels in the factory. Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm. Additional notes 3 212 to 3 218.
If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel Spare wheel 3
may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you
use the spare wheel the vehicles handling Depending on the version, the spare wheel
may be altered. Obtain a replacement for may take the form of a temporary spare
the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and wheel 3: vehicle driveability may be
have the wheel balanced and fitted to altered by use of the spare wheel. Obtain a
the vehicle. replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as
possible, and have the wheel balanced
and fitted to the vehicle.
1)
Country-specific version: The spare wheel is
only to be used as a temporary spare wheel.
320 Technical data
Tyre pressure (overpressure)

Saloon Comfort with load up ECO1) with load up to With full load [kPa/bar]
to 3 persons [kPa/bar] 3 persons [kPa/bar]
Engine Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
Z 12 XEP 195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 250/2.5
205/55 R 16
Z 14 XEP 185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15
195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 250/2.5
205/55 R 16
Z 16 XE1 195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 250/2.5
205/55 R 16
Z 16 XER 185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 250/2.5
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
Z 16 LET 205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 270/2.7 250/2.5 280/2.8 310/3.1
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)2)
1)
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
2)
Notes on temporary spare wheel 3 235.
Technical data 321

Saloon Comfort with load up ECO1) with load up to With full load [kPa/bar]
Z 18 XER 185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 250/2.5
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)2)
1)
2)
322 Technical data

Saloon Comfort with load up to ECO1) with load up to With full load [kPa/bar]
3 persons [kPa/bar] 3 persons [kPa/bar]
Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 270/2.7 250/2.5 280/2.8 310/3.1
225/40 R 18
Z 20 LEH 205/50 R 172), 240/2.4 240/2.4 250/2.5 290/2.9
225/40 ZR 18,
235/35 ZR 19,
225/45 R 172)3)
225/40 R 18 260/2.6 240/2.4 280/2.8 320/3.2
Z 13 DTH 185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15
195/65 R 15, 210/2.1 210/2.1 250/2.5 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
205/55 R 16
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)4)
1)
2)
Only permitted as winter tyres.
3)
To guarantee a correct speed display, the electronic speedometer must be reprogrammed.
4)
Technical data 323

Saloon Comfort with load up ECO1) with load up to 3 persons With full load [kPa/bar]
to 3 persons [kPa/bar] [kPa/bar]
Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 210/2.1 210/2.1 250/2.5 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 250/2.5 230/2.3 260/2.6 300/3.0
225/40 R 18
Z 17 DTJ, 195/65 R 15 230/2.3 210/2.1 290/2.9 270/2.7 250/2.5 290/2.9
Z 17 DTR
205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 250/2.5 230/2.3 260/2.6 300/3.0
225/40 R 18
Z 17 DTJ2) 185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 290/2.9 270/2.7 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15,
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16
Z 19 DTL, 205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
Z 19 DT, 225/45 R 17
Z 19 DTH
215/45 R 17, 270/2.7 250/2.5 280/2.8 310/3.1
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)3)
1)
2)
Model with pollutant reduction.
3)
324 Technical data

Estate Comfort with load up ECO1) with load up to With full load [kPa/bar]
Z 14 XEP 195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 260/2.6
205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15
Z 16 XE1 195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 260/2.6
205/55 R 16
Z 16 XER 195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 260/2.6
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
Z 16 LET 205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 270/2.7 250/2.5 280/2.8 310/3.1
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)2)
1)
2)
Technical data 325

Z 18 XER 195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 260/2.6
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 270/2.7 250/2.5 280/2.8 310/3.1
225/40 R 18
Z 13 DTH 195/65 R 15, 210/2.1 210/2.1 250/2.5 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)2)
1)
2)
326 Technical data

Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 210/2.1 210/2.1 250/2.5 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 250/2.5 230/2.3 260/2.6 300/3.0
225/40 R 18
Z 17 DTJ, 195/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
Z 17 DTR 205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 250/2.5 230/2.3 260/2.6 300/3.0
225/40 R 18
Z 17 DTJ2) 185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 290/2.9 270/2.7 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15,
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16
Z 19 DTL, 205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
Z 19 DT, 225/45 R 17
Z 19 DTH
215/45 R 17, 270/2.7 250/2.5 280/2.8 310/3.1
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)3)
1)
2)
Model with pollutant reduction.
3)
Technical data 327

Delivery Van Comfort with load up ECO1) with load up to With full load [kPa/bar]
Z 14 XEP 195/65 R 15, 200/2.0 200/2.0 250/2.5 250/2.5 210/2.1 260/2.6
205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15
Z 13 DTH 195/65 R 15, 210/2.1 210/2.1 250/2.5 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 250/2.5 290/2.9
195/60 R 15
Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 210/2.1 210/2.1 250/2.5 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 250/2.5 230/2.3 260/2.6 300/3.0
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)2)
1)
2)
328 Technical data

Delivery Van Comfort with load up ECO1) with load up to With full load [kPa/bar]
Z 17 DTJ, 195/65 R 15, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
Z 17 DTR 205/55 R 16
Z 19 DTL, 205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 270/2.7 250/2.5 250/2.5 290/2.9
Z 19 DT, 225/45 R 17
Z 19 DTH
215/45 R 17, 270/2.7 250/2.5 280/2.8 310/3.1
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)2)
1)
2)
Technical data 329

TwinTop Comfort with load up ECO1) with load up to With full load [kPa/bar]
Z 16 XER 205/55 R 16, 210/2.1 210/2.1 250/2.5 250/2.5 220/2.2 260/2.6
225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 230/2.3 210/2.1 240/2.4 280/2.8
Z 18 XER 205/55 R 16, 210/2.1 210/2.1 250/2.5 250/2.5 220/2.2 260/2.6
225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 230/2.3 210/2.1 240/2.4 280/2.8
Z 16 LET 205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 240/2.4 280/2.8
225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 250/2.5 230/2.3 260/2.6 300/3.0
Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16, 250/2.5 230/2.3 260/2.6 300/3.0
225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 260/2.6 240/2.4 270/2.7 310/3.1
Z 19 DTH 205/55 R 16, 230/2.3 210/2.1 240/2.4 280/2.8
225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 250/2.5 230/2.3 260/2.6 300/3.0
all T 115/70 R 16 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2 420/4.2
(temporary
spare)2)3)
1)
2)
330 Technical data
Capacities
Engine Z 12 XEP, Z 14 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 20 LER
Incl. filter [l] 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.25
Between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Engine Z 20 LEH Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 17 DTJ, Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH

Z 17 DTR
Incl. filter [l] 5.0 3.2 5.0 5.4 4.3 4.3 4.3
Between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Fuel tank
Petrol/Diesel, nominal capacity [l] 52
Technical data 331
Dimensions
Saloon 5-door Saloon 3-door Estate Delivery Van TwinTop
Overall length [mm] 4249 4290 4515 4515 4476
Width [mm] 1753 1753 1753 1753 1759
Width with two exterior mirrors [mm] 2032 2032 2032 2032 2021
Overall height [mm] 1460 1435 1500 1500 1411
Length of luggage compartment floor [mm] 819 819 1085 1825 805
Luggage compartment width [mm] 944 944 1088 1103 734
Height of luggage compartment opening [mm] 614 555 766 775
Wheelbase [mm] 2614 2614 2703 2703 2614
Turning circle diameter [m] 11.20 11.20 11.50 11.50 11.20
332 Technical data
trailer towing equipment
with detachable coupling
ball bar, Saloon1)
All dimensions refer to factory-fitted
towing equipment.
Dimensions
[mm]
A 342.9
B 83
C 513.4
D 488.6
E 211.4
F 94.3
G 160
9 Warning
Only use towing equipment approved

for your vehicle. We recommend
entrusting fitting of towing equipment
at a later date to a workshop.
1)
Do not mount towing equipment to vehicles
with Z 20 LEH engine.
Technical data 333
Installation dimensions of trailer

towing equipment
with detachable coupling ball
bar, Estate, Delivery Van
All dimensions refer to factory-fitted
towing equipment.
Dimensions
[mm]
A 84.0
B 570.0
C 515.0
D 93.5
E 173.0
F 307.6
G 158.0
H 292.6
9 Warning

334 Technical data
trailer towing equipment
with detachable coupling
ball bar, Astra TwinTop
All measurements refer to Opel-approved
towing equipment.
Dimensions
[mm]
A 68.8
B 570.0
C 515.0
D 485.0
E 93.5
F 288.0
G 245.0
9 Warning

Customer information 335
Customer information Recording and protection of

vehicle data
The manufacturer does not call up any
data on an accident or pass on such data
Event data recorder to others, except:
The vehicle has a range of highly z with the consent of the vehicle owner or -
Recording and protection of vehicle
developed systems which monitor and in the case of leased vehicles - with the
data.................................................... 335
control various items of vehicle data. Some consent of the lessee,
data is stored during normal vehicle z when requested to do so by the police or
operation in order to detect faults and similar state organisations,
facilitate any repairs necessary, while other
data is stored by the event data recorder z as part of the defence in the event of a
(EDR) only in the event of an accident or legal case being brought against the
near-accident. manufacturer,
The systems can store data on the state of z prescribed by legislation.
the vehicle and how it was being operated In addition, for the data collected and
(e.g. vehicle speed, use of brakes, wearing received, the manufacturer may:
of seatbelts). To read off this data, special
devices and access to the vehicle are z use it for the manufacturers research
necessary. This takes place in a workshop purposes,
during maintenance. During this, some z make it available for research purposes,
data is transferred to the global GM if adequate confidentiality is assured
diagnostics system. and its use is necessary,
z use summaries jointly with other
organisations for research purposes
which are not linked with any specific
vehicle.
336 Index
Index A Anti-theft locking system ........................ 39

Towing equipment ............................ 222
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 211
Anti-theft protection ............................... 18
Accessories ....................................... 88, 232
Aquaplaning .......................................... 216
Accessory socket ................................... 104
Armrest ...................................... 70, 71, 106
Active head restraints ....................... 21, 69
Ashtray ........................................... 105, 146
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) ........ 142
Automatic
Bulb replacement .............................. 257
Anti-dazzle interior mirror .................. 49
Driving abroad ................................... 146
Automatic air
Air conditioning system ................ 150, 156
recirculation mode ...................... 164, 168
Air intake ................................................ 169
Automatic transmission .......................... 16
Air quality sensor ................................... 164
Automatic mode ....................... 179, 183
Air recirculation system .........156, 160, 168
Control indicator ........................ 180, 185
Air vents ................................................. 152
Driving programme ................... 180, 185
Airbags ..................................................... 91
Fault ........................................... 182, 187
Alarm system ........................................... 44
Interruption of power supply .... 182, 187
Alternator ............................................... 111
Kickdown .................................... 181, 186
Antenna .................................135, 147, 271
Manual mode .................................... 184
Antifreeze ............................................... 287
Selector lever ...............16, 179, 183, 184
Antifreeze protection .................... 287, 290
Winter programme .................... 180, 185
Anti-knock quality of fuel
Automatic wiping .................................. 136
Octane number .................................. 294
AUX input .............................................. 148
Anti-theft alarm system .......................... 44
Index 337
B C Control indicator
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 211
Battery ............................................189, 290 Car Pass ................................................... 28
Airbag .......................................... 95, 102
Interruption Caravan/trailer towing .......................... 188
Engine electronics .............................. 195
of power supply .......... 53, 176, 182, 187 Cargo box ................................................ 80
Exhaust ............................................... 195
Battery discharge protection ................ 146 Catalytic converter ................................ 197
Immobiliser ........................................... 29
Before starting off ................................... 16 CDC (Continuous Damping
Park pilot ............................................ 205
Belt force limiters ..................................... 85 Control) ......................................... 111, 200
Transmission .............................. 180, 185
Belt tensioners .......................................... 85 Central locking system ............................ 38
Tyre pressure
Bleeding, diesel fuel system .................. 226 Changing the battery
monitoring system ..................... 208, 209
Board information display .................... 118 Remote control .................................... 32
Control indicators ............................ 12, 109
Bonnet .................................................... 226 Changing tyre/wheel type .................... 212
Adaptive Forward
Boot, see Luggage compartment ....42, 71 Changing wheels ................................... 237
Lighting (AFL) ............................ 114, 142
Brake assist ............................................ 212 Chassis number,
Belt tensioners ..................................... 86
Brake lamp ............................................. 211 see vehicle identification number ...... 293
Brake system ...................................... 210
Brake system .......................................... 210 Check control ................................... 22, 133
Cruise control ..................................... 202
Brakes Child restraint system .............................. 88
DDS ..................................................... 206
ABS ...................................................... 211 Child safety locks ............................... 47, 51
Deflation detection system ............... 206
Brake assist ........................................ 212 Cigarette lighter ............................ 103, 146
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .... 198
Brake fluid .......................................... 288 Climate control ...................................... 150
IDS+ ............................................. 200, 201
Brake lamps ...............................260, 265 Climate control system ................. 151, 163
Coolant .................................................. 287
Brake servo unit ................................. 188 Clock ....................................................... 116
Coolant level .......................................... 288
Foot brake .......................................... 212 Clutch operation ............................ 178, 189
Coolant temperature ............................ 111
Hand brake ........................................ 212 CO2 emissions ........................................ 302
Cooling ........................................... 157, 162
Bulb replacement ..........................251, 253 Cold start ............................................... 189
Correcting time .............................. 122, 127
Bulbs ...............................................251, 253 Colour information display ................... 118
Coupling socket load ............................ 224
Continuous Damping Control ............... 200
Courtesy lamp ....................................... 144
Continuous Damping
Courtesy lamps
Control (CDC) ............................... 111, 200
Contrast .................................................. 129
Cruise control ......................................... 202
Curtain airbags ....................................... 94
Curve lighting ........................................ 142
338 Index
D E Exhaust gases ........................................ 196

Exhaust system ...................................... 188
Dashboard, see Instrument panel ............ 6 Easy Load ................................................ 81
Exterior lights delayed switch-off ........ 143
Data ..................................................28, 292 Easytronic ................................................. 15
Exterior mirrors .................... 5, 6, 47, 49, 52
Date ........................................................ 120 Driving programmes ......................... 173
Daytime running lights .......................... 138 Fault .................................................... 176 F
Decommissioning .................................. 291 Interruption of power supply ............ 176 Fan ......................................................... 153
Deflation detection system ................... 206 Kickdown ............................................ 174 Filling station
Deflation Detection Selector lever ........................................ 15 Engine oil level ................................... 285
System (DDS) .................................24, 206 Starting off ......................................... 172 Fuel .............................294, 295, 296, 297
Demisting and defrosting Winter programme ............................ 174 Opening the bonnet .......................... 226
Windows ............................................. 155 Economical driving ................................ 190 Tyre pressure ............................. 191, 319
With climate control system .............. 165 Electric sun roof ....................................... 54 Vehicle data ....................................... 292
With the air conditioning Electrical system .................................... 291 Windscreen washer system .............. 290
system .........................................158, 162 Electro-hydraulic power First-aid kit (cushion) ............................ 232
Diesel fuel filter ...................................... 287 assisted steering .................................. 188 Flat tyre .................................................. 240
Diesel fuel system ..........................226, 287 Electronic components .......................... 291 FlexOrganizer .......................................... 79
Diesel particle filter ........... 27, 52, 114, 189 Electronic immobiliser ............................. 29 Fog lamps .............................................. 140
Dimensions ............................................. 331 Electronic Stability Program ................. 198 Bulb replacement .............................. 260
Dipped beam ............................................. 7 Engine code .......... 293, 294, 295, 296, 297 Fog tail lamp ......................................... 140
Bulb replacement .......................254, 257 Engine control indicator ........................ 195 Bulb replacement ...................... 260, 265
Display ............................................117, 118 Engine oil ........................................ 282, 285 Folding roof, see TwinTop ...................... 56
Door handle lighting ............................. 145 Additives ............................................ 282 Folding the backrest ............................... 66
Door locks .........................................28, 273 Filling .................................................. 282 Foot brake ............................................. 212
Doors ...................................................... 111 Viscosity .............................................. 282 Front passenger airbag .......................... 91
Driving abroad Engine oil consumption ......................... 188 Fuel ........................ 192, 294, 295, 296, 297
Headlamps ......................................... 146 Engine oil level ............................... 112, 285 Fuel consumption ..................190, 192, 302
Driving hints ........................................... 188 Engine oil pressure ................................ 109 Fuel filler cap ......................................... 192
Engine speed ......................................... 189 Fuel filter ................................................ 287
Engine wash ........................................... 273 Fuel gauge ............................................. 115
Entry lighting .......................................... 145 Fuel level ................................................ 115
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ........ 198 Fuel system, diesel ................................ 226
Event data recorder .............................. 335 Fuse extractor ........................................ 245
Exhaust control indicator ...................... 195 Fuses ...................................................... 244
Index 339
G Heated exterior mirrors ............... 14, 49, 52 Instrument panel ........................................6

Heated front seats .................................. 68 Instruments ............................................ 108
Gears ................................................15, 178
Heated rear window ................... 14, 49, 52 Interactive Driving System (IDS+).. 198, 200
Generator, see Alternator ..................... 111
Heater .................................................... 169 Interior mirror ....................................... 5, 49
Genuine Opel parts and accessories ... 284
Heating .......................................... 150, 154 Interruption of power supply .......... 53, 134
Glasses compartment ........................... 107
Seats ..................................................... 68 Easytronic ........................................... 176
Glove compartment .............................. 106
With climate control system ............. 164 Electric windows .................................. 53
Glove compartment lighting ................. 145
With the air conditioning Selector lever lock ...................... 182, 187
Bulb replacement ............................... 270
system ......................................... 158, 162 ISOFIX ...................................................... 90
Graphical information display .............. 118
Height adjustment
Gross vehicle weight .............................. 311
Seat belts .............................................. 87
J
Gross vehicle weight rating ................... 311 Jack ................................................ 236, 238
Steering wheel ........................................ 6
H High-pressure cleaners ................. 272, 273 Jump leads ............................................. 227
Hill Start Assist ....................................... 212
Halogen headlamp system .................. 253
Horn .......................................................... 13
K
Bulb replacement ............................... 253 Key
Driving abroad ................................... 146 I Extending ............................................. 28
Hand brake ......................................18, 212 Locking doors ...................................... 38
Identification plate ................................ 292
Hazard warning lamps .....................7, 141 Remove ................................................ 18
Idling ....................................................... 178
Head restraints ..................................21, 69 Starting the engine .............................. 17
IDS+ (Interactive Driving
Headlamp flash ..................................... 139 Keys .......................................................... 28
System) ......................................... 198, 200
Headlamp range adjustment ............... 141
Ignition logic .................................. 122, 129
Headlamp switch .......................6, 138, 139
Ignition system .......................284, 290, 291
Headlamp washer system ......13, 137, 290
Immobiliser ............................................... 29
Headlamps ................................................. 6
Information display ............................... 118
Daytime running lights ...................... 138
Infotainment system ............................. 147
Driving abroad ................................... 146
Inspection system .................................. 283
Fog lamps ........................................... 140
Instrument display ................................. 115
Reversing lamps ................................. 140
Instrument illumination ......................... 144
Warning device .................................. 135
340 Index
L M O
Language selection .......................122, 128 Main beam ......................................... 7, 139 Octane numbers .................................... 294
Lashing eyes ............................................ 79 Bulb replacement ...................... 255, 257 Oil ........................................................... 282
Level control system .............................. 205 Control indicator ................................ 113 Additives ............................................ 282
Light switch ................................................ 6 Maintenance Filling .................................................. 282
Lighting ......................................6, 112, 138 Air conditioning system ..................... 169 Viscosity ............................................. 282
Driving abroad ................................... 146 Antifreeze protection ........................ 287 Oil consumption .................................... 285
Loading ......................... 223, 307, 308, 310 Brake fluid .......................................... 288 Oil level ................................................... 285
Locking doors .......................................... 38 Brakes ................................................. 288 Oil pressure ............................................ 109
Locking from the inside ........................... 40 Catalytic converter ............................ 197 Oils .......................................................... 285
Locks ....................................................... 273 Engine oil ............................................ 285 Opel Service ........................................... 274
Lubricants .............................................. 285 Fuel consumption .............................. 191 Open&Start system .............18, 23, 32, 108
Luggage compartment Tyre pressure ...................................... 213 Operating temperature ........................ 189
Bulb replacement ............................... 270 Tyres ................................................... 215 Outside temperature gauge ................ 119
FlexOrganizer ....................................... 79 Manual transmission, Overrun .......................................... 189, 191
Lighting .............................................. 145 see Transmission ........................... 15, 178
Loading ................................83, 223, 311 Mirrors ............................................ 5, 47, 49
P
Locking ................................................. 42 Misted windows ............................. 155, 165 Paintwork damage ............................... 272
Safety net .......................................77, 78 Mobile telephone ................................... 148 Panoramic windscreen ................ 25, 48, 53
Luggage compartment cover ..........75, 76 Motorway lighting ................................. 142 Park pilot ................................................ 204
Lumbar support ....................................... 66 Muffler, see Exhaust system ................. 196 Parking ..................................................... 18
Parking lamps .................................... 6, 143
N Bulb replacement ...................... 256, 258
Neutral, transmission .............................. 15 Parking the vehicle .................................. 18
Number plate lamps Parts ....................................................... 284
Bulb replacement .............................. 269 Pedals ..................................................... 189
Number plate lighting ........................... 269 Performance .......................................... 302
Number plates ....................................... 291 Petrol ..............................294, 295, 296, 297
Index 341
Pollen filter ............................................. 169 Replacement keys ................................... 28 Self-help ................................................. 226
Power assisted steering, Reversing lamps Central locking system ........................ 41
see electro-hydraulic power Bulb replacement ...................... 260, 265 Electric sun roof ................................... 55
assisted steering .................................. 188 Rollover protection system ..................... 59 Electric windows .................................. 53
Power steering, see electro-hydraulic Roof lining .................................... 25, 48, 53 Information display ........................... 120
power assisted steering ....................... 188 Roof load .........84, 188, 191, 307, 308, 310 Remote control .............................. 31, 37
Preheating ........................................18, 114 Roof rack ......................... 84, 191, 219, 311 Service interval display ......................... 283
Preheating switch .................................... 18 Roof racks ....................... 84, 191, 219, 311 Service intervals ..................................... 274
Puddle light ............................................ 145 Run-flat tyres ................................. 216, 217 Additional operations ....................... 281
Running in for the first 1000 km ........... 188 Extreme operating conditions .......... 281
Q Running-in Main inspection ................................. 274
Quickheat ............................................... 169 Brakes ................................................. 288 Service work ........................................... 283
Side airbags ............................................. 93
R S Signal system ........................................... 13
Radio ..............................................135, 147 Safeguard against Spare fuses ............................................ 244
Radio equipment (CB) ........................... 148 unauthorised use ............................. 17, 19 Spare keys ................................................ 28
Radio reception .............................135, 147 Safety accessories ........................... 88, 232 Spare wheel ...........................234, 235, 237
Rain sensor ............................................. 136 Safety net ........................................... 77, 78 Speed ............................................. 190, 191
Reading lamps ...............................144, 145 Saving energy ........................................ 190 Fuel consumption ...................... 190, 191
Rear lamp cluster ................................... 138 Seat adjustment .................................. 3, 64 Speedometer ......................................... 115
Bulb replacement .......................260, 265 Seat belts ......................................... 87, 272 Sport mode ............................................ 111
Rear screen wiper .................................. 137 Seat height adjustment .................. 3, 4, 65 Sport programme ............................ 23, 200
Rear window Seat occupancy recognition ................... 96 Starting the engine ......................... 29, 171
washer system .............. 14, 137, 271, 290 Seat position ............................................ 67 Steam-jet cleaners ........................ 272, 273
Refuelling ................................................ 192 Seats ............................................... 3, 64, 66 Steering column lock ......................... 17, 18
Fuel filler cap ...................................... 193 Heated .................................................. 68 Steering wheel adjustment ........................6
Remote control Selector lever ..........................171, 179, 183 Steering wheel remote control ....... 22, 147
Central locking system ........2, 23, 30, 34 Selector lever lock ....................16, 179, 183 Stowage compartments ....................... 106
Steering wheel ..............................22, 147 Self-diagnosis .................................... 86, 96 Sun roof .................................................... 54
Sun visors .............................25, 48, 53, 145
Sunblind ................................................... 54
System settings .............................. 121, 127
342 Index
T Transmission, Easytronic U
Driving programmes ......................... 173
Tables ..................................................... 106 Units of measure ........................... 123, 128
Fault .................................................... 176
Tachometer ............................................ 115 Unleaded fuel ................................ 194, 294
Interruption of power supply ............ 176
Tail lamps ............................................... 138
Bulb replacement .......................260, 265
Kickdown ............................................ 174 V
Selector lever ................................ 15, 172
Tailgate .................................................... 42 Valve cap key ................................ 214, 319
Winter programme ............................ 174
Tank Vehicle care ........................................... 271
Transmission, manual ..................... 15, 178
Fuel gauge ......................................... 115 Vehicle decommissioning ..................... 291
Tread depth ........................................... 215
Technical data ....................................... 292 Vehicle identification number .............. 293
Trip computer ..........................22, 123, 129
Telephone, see Mobile telephone ........ 148 Vehicle keys, see Keys ............................ 28
Trip odometer ........................................ 116
Temperature regulation ................153, 164 Vehicle recommissioning ...................... 291
Triple information display ..................... 118
Tempomat, see cruise control .............. 202 Vehicle tools .......................................... 236
TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) .................. 225
Temporary spare wheel ................218, 235 Ventilation .....................150, 154, 161, 167
Turn signal lamps ...................................... 7
The first 1000 km ................................... 188
Tightening torque ..........................240, 319
Turn signals W
Bulb replacement ..............259, 260, 265
Tilt angle Warning buzzers ................................... 135
Twin Audio ....................................... 23, 148
Seats ................................................. 4, 65 Warning messages ................................ 133
TwinTop ................................................... 56
Time ........................................................ 120 Warning triangle ................................... 232
Closing the roof ................................... 57
Tools ....................................................... 236 Washer fluid reservoir,
Opening the roof ................................. 56
Towing equipment ................................ 220 windscreen washer system ................. 290
Rollover protection .............................. 59
Towing eye .....................................229, 230 Weights ..................................307, 308, 310
Warning buzzers .................................. 58
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) .................. 225 Wheels .................................................... 212
Wind deflector ..................................... 61
Transmission display .... 117, 170, 178, 183 Wheels, tyres .......................................... 212
Tyre chains ..................................... 218, 319
Transmission, automatic ......................... 16 Wind deflector ......................................... 61
Tyre condition ........................................ 215
Automatic mode ........................179, 183 Windows ................................................... 50
Tyre pressure .................. 24, 207, 213, 319
Driving programme ...................180, 185 Demisting
Tyre pressure monitoring system ......... 207
Fault ............................................182, 187 and defrosting ...........155, 158, 162, 165
Tyre repair kit ........................................ 240
Interruption of power supply ....182, 187 Windscreen washer system ............ 13, 137
Kickdown ....................................181, 186 Antifreeze protection ........................ 290
Selector lever ............... 16, 179, 183, 184 Washer fluid reservoir ....................... 290
Selector lever lock ................................ 16
Winter programme ....................180, 185
Index 343
Windscreen wipers ...................13, 136, 289

Winter mode
Starting-off aid .................................. 174
Winter operation
Battery ................................................ 189
Coolant, antifreeze ............................ 287
Fuel consumption .............................. 191
Fuel for diesel engines ....................... 192
Heating .............................. 150, 158, 162
Locks ................................................... 273
Tyre chains .................................218, 319
Window demisting and defrosting ... 155
Windscreen washer system,
antifreeze protection ......................... 290
Winter programme ............... 174, 180, 185
Winter tyres ....................................217, 319
X
Xenon headlamp system ...................... 257
Bulb replacement ............................... 257
Driving abroad ................................... 146
344 Index

Astra 2584 12 en Low Res

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Astra 2584 12 en Low Res

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

OPEL Astra

Operation, Safety, Maintenance

Picture no: 16968t.tif Picture no: 17333t.tif

Picture no: 16970t.tif Picture no: 16971t.tif Picture no: 16973t.tif

Picture no: 18607t.tif Picture no: 16975t.tif Picture no: 16976t.tif

Picture no: 18533t.tif Picture no: 16977t.tif Picture no: 16978t.tif

Picture no: 18437T.tif Picture no: 17328t.tif Picture no: 16986t.tif

Picture no: 16987t.tif Picture no: 16989t.tif Picture no: 16991t.tif

Control indicators A Engine electronics, gearbox T Winter programme of

Picture no: 16992t.tif Picture no: 16993t.tif Picture no: 16996t.tif

Picture no: 16997t.tif Picture no: 16998t.tif Picture no: 16999t.tif

Picture no: 17000t.tif Picture no: 17001t.tif Picture no: 17002t.tif

Before starting off, check

Picture no: 16982t.tif Picture no: 17033t.tif Picture no: 17005t.tif

Parking the vehicle

z If the vehicle is on a level surface or an Advice when parking Noteworthy functions

Picture no: 17009t.tif Picture no: 17110t.tif Picture no: 17351t.tif

Picture no: 17011t.tif Picture no: S0013209.tif Picture no: 17013t.tif

Board Computer 19,5 19:36

Picture no: 17344t.tif Picture no: 17339t.tif Picture no: 17015t.tif

Picture no: 17026t.tif Picture no: 17333t.tif Picture no: 17961t.tif

Picture no: 17018t.tif Picture no: 17334t.tif Picture no: 18494t.tif

Picture no: 17979t.tif Picture no: 17203t.tif Picture no: 17092t.tif

Picture no: 17087t.tif Picture no: 17980t.tif Picture no: 17981t.tif

The roof is operated with the buttons on Diesel particle filter 3

Picture no: 18537t.tif

Keys, doors, windows, Replacement keys

Picture no: 17349t.tif Picture no: 17033t.tif Picture no: 17028t.tif

Store personal vehicle settings in

Key with fixed key section

Picture no: 17031t.tif Picture no: 17333t.tif

If the brake or clutch pedal is depressed,

The remote control has a range of approx.

Picture no: 17034t.tif Picture no: 17035t.tif

InSP3 in the service display or an

Picture no: 17038t.tif Picture no: 18439t.tif Picture no: 17033t.tif

z Electronic key out of reception range,

Picture no: 16968t.tif Picture no: 17032t.tif Picture no: 17042t.tif

Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,

Do not use the system if there are people

Picture no: 17034t.tif Picture no: 17043t.tif

z Locked doors unlock automatically in Fault

For Astra TwinTop with open roof - after Luggage compartment

Picture no: 16969t.tif Picture no: 17049t.tif Picture no: 17042t.tif

Anti-theft alarm system 3

Do not use the system if there are people

4. Switch on the anti-theft alarm system.

Picture no: 17050t.tif Picture no: 17051t.tif

In the event of a fault in the remote control

Picture no: 17052t.tif Picture no: 16978t.tif Picture no: 18437t.tif

If an electrical retracted mirror is extended

Picture no: 18438t.tif Picture no: 17120t.tif

Press button n again - both exterior

Picture no: 17147t.tif Picture no: 16977t.tif Picture no: 17121t.tif

Electric windows 3 Readiness for operation

Picture no: 17135t.tif Picture no: 17136t.tif Picture no: 17976t.tif

Picture no: 17046t.tif Picture no: 17034t.tif Picture no: 17147t.tif

Picture no: 17138t.tif Picture no: 17139t.tif

Note Overload Fault

Take care when operating the

Picture no: 17970t.tif Picture no: 17963t.tif Picture no: 17971t.tif

z The roof can be held in an intermediate Fault Rollover protection system

Picture no: 17975t.tif Picture no: 17974t.tif Picture no: 17973t.tif

Blockage of boot lid on closure 3